Yamaha PSR-E453 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: PSR-E453

Categorie: Muziekinstrumenten

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the

advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual

in a safe and handy place for future reference.

Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 5–7.

Setting UpReferenceAppendix Quick Guide

DIGITAL KEYBOARD

Owner’s Manual

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

For PSR-E453/PSR-EW400

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).

DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other

than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically

recommended by Yamaha.

WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone

could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting

cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended!

If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’

cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the

larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, con-

sult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at

the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or

modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update

existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and

headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels

that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long

periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfort-

able. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you

should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory

mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as

optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer

assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and

any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE

using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other

uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are

not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the

owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-

ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keep-

ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be

aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-

tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and

never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed cor-

rectly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and

battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all bat-

teries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some rea-

son its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all

local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-

ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable

to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model

number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this

plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the

date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual

as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-BP (bottom)

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard

Model Name : PSR-E453/PSR-EW400

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(FCC DoC)

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

For AC adaptor and PSR-E453/PSR-EW400

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-

tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,

6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be

found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit.

You should note this serial number in the space provided below and

retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid

identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom_en_01)

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and main-

tenance (servicing) instructions in the liter-

ature accompanying the product.

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor-

dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

amplifiers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,

and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tri-

pod, bracket, or table specified by

the manufacturer, or sold with the

apparatus. When a cart is used,

use caution when moving the

cart/apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when unused for long periods of

time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser-

vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam-

aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is

damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen

into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to

rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has

been dropped.

(UL60065_03)

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

For AC adaptor

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.

(can_b_01)

(fcc_sengen_C)

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

For AC adaptor

WARNING

• This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic

instruments. Do not use for any other purpose.

• Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments.

CAUTION

• When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible.

If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the

power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor

from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet,

keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if

the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the

instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord

from the wall AC outlet.

For PSR-E453/PSR-EW400

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or

even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These

precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the

cord, or place heavy objects on it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The

required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 72) only. Using the wrong adaptor

can result in damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust

which may have accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open

the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal

components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,

discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp

or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases,

bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any

openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument,

turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the

AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha

service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

Power supply/AC adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

DMI-5 1/3

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning

item may fall over and cause a fire.

• Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in

explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage.

- Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.

- Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

- Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be

charged.

- Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as

necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys.

- Use the specified battery type (page 72) only.

- Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model,

and made by the same manufacturer.

- Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the

+/- polarity markings.

- When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used

for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument.

- When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came

with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when

charging.

• Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally

swallow them.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the

battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or

skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery

fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical

burns.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the

power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If

you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.)

Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel.

- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

- It emits unusual smells or smoke.

- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to

you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but

are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a

multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or

possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,

always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord

can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not

to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to

prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip

over them.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are

using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs,

immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug

from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off,

electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level.

When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to

unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it,

use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage

to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components,

turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on

or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum

levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the

instrument to set the desired listening level.

Fire warning

Battery

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC adaptor

Location

Connections

DMI-5 2/3

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps

on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you

or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or

operational failure.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the

instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons,

switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period

of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can

cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss

or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.

When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage

to the product, damage to data, or damage to

other property, follow the notices below.

 Handling

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio,

stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices.

Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

When you use the instrument along with an application on

your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you

set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to

avoid noise caused by communication.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or

vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct

sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to

the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified

operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the

instrument, since this might discolor the panel or

keyboard.

 Maintenance

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use

paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or

chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

 Saving data

• Some of the data of this instrument (page 39) are retained

when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may

be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save

your important data onto USB flash drive/an external

device such as a computer (pages 36, 64). Before using a

USB flash drive, make sure to refer to page 62.

• To protect against data loss through USB flash drive

damage, we recommend that you save your important data

onto spare USB flash drive or an external device such as a

computer as backup data.

Information

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data

including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is

strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

• This product incorporates and bundles contents in which

Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha

has license to use others' copyrights. Due to copyright

laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to

distribute media in which these contents are saved or

recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to

those in the product.

* The contents described above include a computer

program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE

data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc.

* You are allowed to distribute medium in which your

performance or music production using these contents is

recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is

not required in such cases.

 About functions/data bundled with the

instrument

• Some of the preset songs and the songs that can be

downloaded from the Yamaha website have been edited for

length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as

the original.

 About this manual

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual

are for instructional purposes only, and may appear

somewhat different from those on your instrument.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft®

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are

the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective

companies.

Handling caution

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

DMI-5 3/3

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide Reference AppendixSetting Up

Table of Contents

Special Features ..............................................................8

Compatible Format and Functions .................................10

Included Accessories .....................................................10

About the Manuals .........................................................11

Setting Up

Panel Controls and Terminals 12

Setting Up 14

Power Requirements......................................................14

Turning the Power On/Off ..............................................16

Adjusting the Master Volume .........................................16

Connecting Headphones or an External Device ............16

Using a Pedal (Sustain) .................................................17

Using a Keyboard Stand ................................................17

Quick Guide

Basic Operation and Display Items 18

Basic Operation..............................................................18

Display Items..................................................................19

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 20

Selecting a Main Voice...................................................20

Playing the “Grand Piano”..............................................20

Layering a Dual Voice ....................................................21

Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ....................21

Using the Metronome .....................................................22

Adding Harmony ............................................................23

Creating Arpeggios 24

Triggering Arpeggios ......................................................24

Changing the Arpeggio Type .........................................24

Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs 25

Assigning Functions to the Knobs ..................................25

Using the Knobs .............................................................25

Playing Styles 26

Using the Music Database .............................................26

Playing with Patterns Like a DJ! 27

Playing Songs 28

Listening to a Demo Song..............................................28

Selecting and Playing Back a Song ...............................28

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ..............29

Playing a Specified Section of a Song Repeatedly

(A-B Repeat) ..............................................................29

Turning Each Track On/Off ............................................29

Using the Song Lesson Feature 30

Making Practice Perfect—Repeat & Learn ....................31

Recording Your Performance 32

Track Structure of a Song ..............................................32

Quick Recording ............................................................32

Recording to a Specified Track......................................33

Clearing a User Song.....................................................34

Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song................34

Memorizing Your Favorite Settings

(Registration Memory) 35

Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory

...35

Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory

..35

Connecting to Other Devices 36

Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in

Speakers....................................................................36

Connecting to a Computer .............................................36

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad .......................................37

Using the Melody Suppressor ........................................37

Using an External Stereo System for Playback

(OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks) (PSR-EW400)...............38

Speaker Mute On/Off Setting (PSR-EW400) .................38

Backup and Initialization 39

Backup Parameters .......................................................39

Initializing the Instrument ...............................................39

Play a Variety of

Instrument Voices

Page 20

The instrument voice that sounds

when you play the keyboard can

be changed to violin, flute, harp, or

any of an extensive range of

voices.

Arpeggio Function

Page 24

Similar to the arpeggio functions

provided on some synthesizers,

this function automatically pro-

duces arpeggios (broken chords)

when you simply play the appro-

priate notes on the keyboard.

Play Audio via an

External Device

Page 36

By connecting an external audio

device such as an iPhone/iPad or

a device such as a computer, you

can play the audio sound of that

external device through this instru-

ment.

Special Features

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick GuideReferenceAppendix Setting Up

Reference

Handy Performance Features 40

Selecting a Reverb Type ................................................40

Selecting a Chorus Type ................................................40

Pitch Controls—Transpose ............................................41

Pitch Controls—Fine Tuning ..........................................41

Pitch Controls—the [PITCH BEND] wheel .....................41

Calling Up Optimum Panel Settings—One Touch

Setting (OTS) .............................................................41

Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard ...........42

Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ..................42

Scale Tuning 43

Selecting a Scale ...........................................................43

Setting the Base Note for Each Scale ............................43

Tuning Each Note to Create an Original Scale ..............44

Voice Settings 45

Selecting a Dual Voice ...................................................45

Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................45

Voice Editing ..................................................................45

Parameters Assigned to the Knobs 46

Adding DSP Effects........................................................48

Arpeggio Settings 49

Synchronizing an Arpeggio to Song/Style/Pattern

Playback—Arpeggio Quantize ...................................49

Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch ........49

Style and Pattern Settings 50

Style Variations—Sections.............................................50

Style Synchro Stop.........................................................51

Turning Each Style Track On/Off ...................................51

Pattern Variations—Sections .........................................52

Pattern Retrigger Function .............................................52

Changing the Tempo......................................................52

Tap Start ........................................................................52

Adjusting the Volume of the Style or Pattern .................53

Setting the Split Point.....................................................53

Playing Chords Without Style Playback

(Stop Accompaniment) ..............................................53

Chord Types for Style Playback.....................................54

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............55

Song Settings 56

BGM (Background Music) Playback ..............................56

Random Song Playback ................................................56

Tempo Setting of the Song ............................................57

Tap Start ........................................................................57

Song Volume .................................................................57

Melody Voice Setting of the Preset Song ......................57

The Functions 58

Basic Procedure in the Function Display .......................58

USB Flash Drive Operations 62

Connecting a USB Flash Drive ......................................63

Formatting a USB Flash Drive .......................................64

Saving User Data to a USB Flash Drive ........................64

Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Drive .......65

Loading User Data from a USB Flash Drive ..................66

Loading a Style File .......................................................67

Deleting a User File in the USB Flash Drive ..................68

Deleting an SMF File in the USB Flash Drive ................68

Exiting from a File Control Display .................................69

Message List ..................................................................69

Appendix

Troubleshooting ............................................................. 70

Specifications................................................................. 71

Index .............................................................................. 73

Play Along with Styles

Page 26

The auto-accompaniment Styles

provide the equivalent of a full

backing band covering a wide vari-

ety of music genres. Select a

Style that matches the music you

want to play, or experiment with

new Styles to expand your musi-

cal horizons.

Create New Sounds

Page 25

By simply adjusting two knobs you

can enhance the sound of your

performance with dynamic effect

processing, such as adding distor-

tion or applying luscious reverb.

The functions that can be

assigned to the knobs include fil-

ter, DSP effect, etc.

Try playing like a DJ by

using the Patterns!

Page 27

The Pattern function lets you per-

form like a DJ. Use the Track Con-

trol to try out various instrument

combinations, and play with the

Knobs to create various new

sounds.

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual (this book)

• Data List

• AC adaptor

• Power cord (PSR-EW400)

• Music rest

• Online Member Product Registration

*1:May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer.

*2:The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.

Compatible Format and Functions

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compati-

ble music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of

manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM

System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone genera-

tion format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator.

However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original

data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a com-

puter with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the

power to the computer is on).

STYLE FILE FORMAT (SFF)

The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion

system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord

types.

Insert the music rest

into the slots as

shown.

Attaching the Music Rest

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

About the Manuals

This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.

 Included Documents

Owner’s Manual (this book)

• Setting Up Please read this section first.

• Quick Guide This section explains how to use the basic functions.

• Reference This section explains how to make detailed settings for the various functions of

the instrument.

• Appendix This section includes troubleshooting and specifications.

Data List

Contains various important preset content lists such as those of Voices, Styles, Patterns and Effects.

 Online Materials (PDF)

MIDI Reference

Contains MIDI-related information for this instrument.

MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

Contains basic explanations about MIDI.

Computer-related Operations

Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transmit-

ting/receiving the data.

iPhone/iPad Connection Manual

Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc.

To obtain these materials, access the Yamaha Downloads website, then enter the model name for searching the

desired files.

Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/

• The illustrations and displays as shown in this manual are based on the PSR-E453.

• Please note that the PSR-EW400 and PSR-E453 have different numbers of keys: the PSR-EW400 has 76 keys, and the PSR-E453 has

61 keys.

Downloading the Song Book/Song Data

Song Book (only in English, French, German, Spanish and Japanese)

Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument and

the optional Songs.

Song Data

Contains the data of 70 Songs that can be played back with this instrument and/or used for the

Song Lesson (page 30).

After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download the Song Book and the

Song Data free of charge.

Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/

You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this

manual in order to fill out the User Registration form.

NOTE

• The downloaded Song data can be played back by transferring data from the computer to the instrument or saving data to

the USB flash drive (page 28).

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Panel Controls and Terminals

Front Panel

Setting Up

!3 !6

!9 @0 @1

e r t y

u i o !0

036

(C1)

048

(C2)

060

(C3)

072

(C4)

084

(C5)

096

(C6)

• Voice List (Data List)

• Style List (Data List)

• Song List (Data List)

• Pattern List (Data List)

Dial (page 18)

Display (page 19)

As illustrated, each note of the key-

board has a specific note number

and name (e.g., 036/C1), which is

used in making various settings,

such as Split Point (page 53).

PSR-E453: 036 (C1) – 096 (C6)

PSR-EW400: 028 (E0) – 103 (G6)

The illustration is of the PSR-E453.

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

Setting Up

q [ ] (Standby/On) switch ....................Page 16

w [MASTER VOLUME] control ................Page 16

e [PORTABLE GRAND] button...............Page 20

r [DEMO] button......................................Page 28

t [TRANSPOSE] button ..........................Page 41

y [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........Page 37

u [LESSON] button..................................Page 30

i [REC] button .........................................Page 32

o [METRONOME] button.........................Page 22

!0 [TEMPO/TAP] button............................Page 52

!1 VOICE CONTROL section

[SPLIT] button...................................Page 21

[DUAL] button ...................................Page 21

[HARMONY] button ..........................Page 23

[ARPEGGIO] button..........................Page 24

!2 LIVE CONTROL section

[ASSIGN] button ...............................Page 25

[A] and [B] knobs .............................Page 25

[DSP] button......................................Page 48

!3 CATEGORY buttons .............................Page 18

!4 [FUNCTION] button..............................Page 58

!5 [MUSIC DATABASE] button.................Page 26

!6 Number buttons [1]–[9], [-/NO],

[0/EXECUTE] and [+/YES] buttons .....Page 18

!7 REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons

[BANK/MEMORY] buttons................Page 35

[1]–[4] buttons...................................Page 35

!8 [PATTERN] button ................................Page 27

!9 [SONG] button......................................Page 28

@0 [STYLE] button .....................................Page 26

@1 [VOICE] button .....................................Page 20

@2 PATTERN/SONG/STYLE Control buttons

•When the [PATTERN] lamp is on:

................................Pages 27 and 52

•When the [SONG] lamp is on:

..............................................Page 29

•When the [STYLE] lamp is on:

.........................Pages 26, 50, and 51

@3 TR

ACK CONTROL buttons

•When the [PATTERN] lamp is on:

..............................................Page 27

•When the [SONG] lamp is on:

......................................Pages 29, 32

•When the [STYLE] lamp is on:

..............................................Page 51

@4 [PITCH BEND] wheel ...........................Page 41

@5 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit....Page 20

These indicate the drum or percussion instrument assigned to

the corresponding keys (in the case of “Standard Kit 1,” shown

in the Drum/SFX Kit List of the separate Data List).

Rear Panel

@6 OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks (PSR-EW400)

..............................................Page 38

@7 [SUSTAIN] jack .....................................Page 17

@8 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack (PSR-E453),

[PHONES] jack (PSR-EW400) .............Page 16

@9 [AUX IN] jack ........................................Page 36

#0 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal .................Page 62

[USB TO HOST] terminal .....................Page 36

#1 DC IN jack.............................................Page 14

@7@6 @8 @9

#0 #1

@7 @8 @9

#0 #1

PSR-EW400

PSR-E453

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Power Requirements

Although the instrument will run either from an AC

adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an

AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is

more environmentally friendly than batteries and

does not deplete resources.

Using an AC Adaptor

Connect the AC adaptor in the order shown in the

illustration.

Using Batteries

This instrument requires the following batteries.

• PSR-E453: Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese

(R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.

• PSR-EW400: Six “D” size alkaline (LR20), manga-

nese (R20) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.

The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH batter-

ies are recommended for this instrument, since other

types may result in poorer battery performance.

1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off.

2 Open the battery compartment cover located on

the instrument’s bottom panel.

• You should use an AC adaptor when executing USB flash

drive operations, since battery power may not be reliable

enough to last through these crucial operations.

• Use the specified AC adaptor (page 72) only. Using the

wrong AC adaptor can result in damage to the instrument

or overheating.

• When using the AC adaptor with a removable plug, make

sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor. Using the

plug alone can cause electric shock or fire.

• Never touch the metallic section when attaching the plug.

To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be

careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and

plug.

NOTICE

AC outlet

adaptor

DC IN jack

(page 13)

PSR-EW400

PSR-E453

DC IN jack

(page 13)

AC Outlet

Power cord

adaptor

The shape of the plug differs

depending on your area.

WARNING

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet

you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or mal-

function occurs, immediately turn the power off and dis-

connect the plug from the outlet.

• Follow this procedure in reverse order when disconnecting

the AC adaptor.

• When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that

came with the batteries.

Slide the plug as

indicated.

Plug

The shape of the plug differs

depending on your area.

CAUTION

NOTE

NOTICE

PSR-E453

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

3 Insert the six new batteries, putting them in the

correct direction according to the illustration.

4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that

it locks firmly in place.

 Setting the battery type

Depending on the battery type to be used, you may

need to change the battery type setting on this instru-

ment. To change the setting, first turn on the power to

the instrument, then choose the battery type you

would like to use. Alkaline (and manganese) batteries

are chosen by default. For details, refer to page 61,

Function 068 (PSR-E453)/Function 069 (PSR-

EW400).

 Checking the power status

You can confirm the power source at the left corner of

the display.

: The power is supplied from the AC adaptor.

: The power is supplied from the batteries.

Remaining battery power indication

• Connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor with batteries

installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of data

being recorded or transferred at the time.

• Make sure to set the battery type correctly (page 15).

• When battery power becomes too low for proper operation,

the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted,

and other problems may occur. When this happens, make

sure to replace all batteries with new ones or already-

recharged ones.

PSR-EW400

PSR-E453

NOTICE

• This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the

specified charger device when charging.

• Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an

AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the

instrument.

• Failure to set the battery type may shorten the amount of

the battery life. Make sure to set the battery type correctly.

• When the AC adaptor is plugged in to the AC outlet, the bat-

tery icon does not appear even when batteries are inserted. In

this case, the power is supplied from the AC adaptor.

Indicates that the power will be turned off immedi-

ately. When rechargeable batteries are used, this

icon flashes before the power is turned off.

Indicates that remaining power is insufficient for

operation. Before the power runs out, replace all

the batteries with new ones, or fully recharged

ones (when using rechargeable types). Note that

the instrument may not work properly, including

unusually soft volume and poor sound quality

when remaining power becomes low.

Indicates that the remaining power is sufficient.

NOTE

NOTICE

Only one of these is shown.

GrandPno

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Turning the Power On/Off

1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] control to

“MIN”.

2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the

power on.

Adjust the volume as desired while playing the

keyboard.

3 Press and hold the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for

about a second to turn the power off.

Setting the Auto Power Off function

To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this

instrument features an Auto Power Off function that

automatically turns the power off if the instrument is

not operated for a specified period of time. The

amount of time that elapses before the power is auto-

matically turned off is 30 minutes by default; however,

you can change the setting. For details, refer to page

61, Function 067 (PSR-E453)/Function 068 (PSR-

EW400).

 Disabling Auto Power Off (simple method)

Turn the power on while holding down the lowest key

on the keyboard. Then the instrument starts up with

the Auto Power Off function disabled.

Adjusting the Master Volume

To adjust the volume of the entire keyboard sound,

use the [MASTER VOLUME] control while playing

the keyboard.

Connecting Headphones or an

External Device

 Connecting Headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES/

OUTPUT]/[PHONES] jack on the rear panel.

The built-in speakers are automatically shut off when

a plug is inserted into this jack.

 Connecting an External Device

• PSR-E453: This jack also functions as an external

output. By connecting to a computer, keyboard

amplifier, recorder, or other audio device, you can

• Even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is

still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not

using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug

the AC adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

• Press only the [ ] (Standby/On) switch when turning the

power on. Any other operations such as pressing keys,

buttons or the pedal are not allowed. Doing so may cause

the instrument to malfunction.

CAUTION

NOTICE

PSR-EW400

PSR-E453

The lowest key

• When the instrument is not operated for a specified period

of time while connected to an external device such as an

amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the

instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to

the instrument and the connected devices, in order to pro-

tect the devices from damage. If you do not want the

power to turn off automatically when a device is con-

nected, disable Auto Power Off.

• Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the

power is turned off. For details, see page 39.

• Do not use the instrument for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause

permanent hearing loss.

NOTICE

NOTE

CAUTION

Standard stereo

phone plug

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

output the audio signal of this instrument to that

external device. The speakers of this instrument

are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted

into this jack.

• PSR-EW400: When connecting an external

speaker, refer to page 38.

Using a Pedal (Sustain)

You can produce a natural sustain as you play by

pressing a footswitch (FC5 or FC4A; sold separately)

plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack.

Using a Keyboard Stand

The following keyboard stands (sold separately) can

be used.

• PSR-E453: L-2C

• PSR-EW400: L-6

When using L-6 Keyboard Stand

(PSR-EW400)

The exterior size of PSR-EW400 is beyond the limits

as described in the L-6 Assembly Instructions. How-

ever, we have determined through tests that the

stand can be safely used for the instrument. When

setting the instrument, place it on the center of the

stand as shown in the illustration.

• Do not use the headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause

permanent hearing loss.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic com-

ponents, turn off the power of all the components. Also,

before turning any components on or off, make sure to set

all volume levels to minimum. Otherwise, damage to the

components or electrical shock may occur.

• To avoid possible damage to the external device, first turn

on the power to the instrument, then to the external device.

When turning off the power, do so in reverse order: first

turn off the power to the external device, then to the instru-

ment.

• Plug or unplug the footswitch while the power is off. Also, do

not press the footswitch when turning the power on. Doing so

changes the polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed

operation.

• The sustain function does not affect Split Voices (page 21).

• Some Voices may sound continuously or have a long decay

after the notes have been released while the footswitch is

held.

CAUTION

NOTICE

NOTE

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where

it might accidentally slip down. This could cause physical

injury to you or others, as well as damage to the instru-

ment or other property.

Place the instrument so

that the left and right

parts of the stand are

inside the protrusions on

the bottom panel of the

instrument.

Make sure that the bottom of

the instrument firmly rests on

the stoppers.

CAUTION

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Basic Operation and Display Items

Basic Operation

This instrument features four basic functions: Voice, Style, Pattern and Song. To use this instrument, select a

basic function first, and then make various settings.

Press

briefly to

increase.

3 Start a function or play

the keyboard.

2 Select an item

or value.

1 Select a basic

function.

Rotate the dial clockwise to

increase the value of the

selected item, or counter-

clockwise to decrease it’s

value.

Dial

Increase

When selecting a Voice, Style,

Pattern, Song, etc., you can use

these buttons to jump to the first

item in the next or previous cate-

gory.

These buttons can also be used

to select function items sequen-

tially after pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button.

CATEGORY [+], [-] buttons

Use these buttons to directly

enter the desired Style/Voice

number etc, or a parameter

value.

Example:

Selecting Voice 003,

Bright Piano.

Number buttons [0]–[9]

Press the [+/YES] button briefly

to increase the value by 1, or

press the [-/NO] button briefly to

decrease the value by 1. Press

and hold either button to continu-

ously increase or decrease the

value in the corresponding direc-

tion.

Pressing both buttons simultane-

ously lets you reset a parameter

to the default value.

[+/YES], [-/NO] buttons

Decrease

Press

briefly to

decrease.

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

Buttons having this indication can be

used to call up an alternate function when

the relevant button is pressed and held.

Hold down this button until the function calls

up.

Depending on the basic function selected in step 1, you can use

the different functions as printed on the panel. Song functions are

printed above the buttons, Pattern functions are printed further

above, and Style functions are printed below.

Jumps to

the first

item in the

category.

Jumps to

the first

item in

the next

category.

In most procedures described throughout this

manual, the dial is used for selecting items or

changing values. Note however, that in most

cases in which the dial can be used to

change values, the [+/YES] and [-/NO] but-

tons can also be used.

Press number

buttons [0], [0],

[3].

Quick Guide

Basic Operation and Display Items

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Display Items

The display shows all the current settings of the Song, Style Pattern, Voice and other related functions.

GrandPno

001

This area indicates the on/off status of

each function. Each indication is

shown when the corresponding func-

tion is turned on.

page 21

page 23

page 24

page 48

page 43

page 42

page 26

page 51

On/off status

Normally this indicates the notes you play. When

the Song Lesson function is used, this indicates

the current notes and chord of playback. When

the Dictionary function is used, this indicates the

notes of the chord you specify.

Notation

• Any notes occurring below or above the staff are

indicated by “8va.”

• For a few specific chords, not all notes may be

shown, due to space limitations in the display.

NOTE

Indicates the source from which this

instrument obtains power, AC adaptor or

batteries (page 15).

Appears when USB flash drive is con-

nected to this instrument (page 63).

Power source status

USB connection status

Indicates the current beat of playback (page 28).

Indicates the parameters currently assigned to the

knobs (page 25).

Indicates the Function number when the [FUNC-

TION] button is pressed, or the current Measure

number during playback of a Song, Style or Pattern.

Indicates the chord which is being played in the Auto

Accompaniment range (page 26) or specified via

Song playback.

Indicates the on/off status of the current

Song, Style or Pattern (pages 27, 29, 32,

51).

Beat

Knob assignment

FUNCTION and MEASURE

Chord

Track status

001

The illustration is of the PSR-E453.

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

This instrument features various instrumental Voices including piano. Not only can you

play just one single Voice (Main Voice), but you can also layer a different Voice (Dual

Voice) to the Main Voice, or play a different Voice (Split Voice) in the left-hand area of

the keyboard from the right-hand area.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The Voice number and name will be shown.

For a list of available Voices, refer to the Voice

List in the separate Data List.

Use the dial to select the desired Voice.

Play the keyboard.

Preset Voice Types

When you want to reset various settings to default

and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTA-

BLE GRAND] button.

The Voice for the entire keyboard will be set to 001

“Grand Piano” (PSR-E453)/ or “Live! Grand Piano”

(PSR-EW400).

Selecting a Main Voice

• Voice number 001 on the PSR-EW400 is “Live! Grand

Piano.”

001–237 Instrument Voices.

238–261

(Drum/SFX Kit)

Various drum/percussion or SFX sounds are

assigned to individual keys. Details on assign-

ing instruments to keys are provided in the

Drum/SFX Kit List of the separate Data List.

262–301 Used for Arpeggio performance (page 24).

302–758 XGlite Voices.

000

Selecting this automatically calls up the most

suitable Voice and panel setups for the cur-

rent Style, Song or Pattern. This function is

called OTS (page 41).

GrandPno

001

Appears when the

[VOICE] button is on.

Voice name

Voice number

NOTE

Flute

137

Playing the “Grand Piano”

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different

Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.”

Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on.

Press the [DUAL] button again to exit

from Dual.

Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice

suitable for the current Main Voice, you can also

select a different Dual Voice (page 45).

By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas,

you can play a different Voice between the Left hand

and Right hand areas.

Press the [SPLIT] button to turn Split on.

The keyboard is divided into left and right hand

area at the Split Point. You can play a Split Voice

on the left hand area while playing a Main Voice

and Dual Voice on the right hand area of the key-

board.

The Split Voice (page 45) and the Split Point can

be changed as desired (page 53).

Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit

from Split.

Layering a Dual Voice

Two Voices will

sound at the same

time.

Appears when

Dual is on

Playing a Split Voice in the Left

Hand area

Appears when

Split is on

Split Voice

Main Voice (and Dual Voice)

Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2)

036

(C1)

048

(C2)

060

(C3)

072

(C4)

084

(C5)

096

(C6)

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

This instrument features a built-in metronome which

can be used when practicing.

Press the [METRONOME] button to start

the metronome.

Press the [METRONOME] button again

to stop the metronome.

Adjusting the Metronome Tempo

This operation lets you adjust not only the metro-

nome tempo, but also the tempo of Style, Song and

Pattern.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up

“Tempo.”

The current tempo is shown on the display.

Adjust the tempo by rotating the dial.

Setting the Time Signature

Here, we’ll set a time signature of 6/8 as an example.

Hold down the [METRONOME] button

for longer than a second to call up

“TimeSigN” (Time Signature Numera-

tor).

The number of beats per measure is shown on

the display.

Rotate the dial to select the number of

beats per measure.

A chime will sound on the first beat of each mea-

sure while a click sounds the other beats. If “0” is

selected, a click sounds for all beats with no

chime accent. Select 6 for this example.

Press the CATEGORY [+] button once to

call up “TimeSigD” (Time Signature

Denominator).

The length of one beat is shown on the display.

Rotate the dial to select the length of

one beat, from 2

, 4

, 8

and 16

note.

Select “08” (8

note) for this example.

Confirm the setting by playing the Met-

ronome.

Setting the Metronome Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “MtrVol” (Function 061).

Rotate the dial to set the volume.

Using the Metronome

Tempo

090

Current tempo

TimeSigN

Hold for longer

than a second.

Number of beats

per measure.

• This parameter cannot be set during playback of a Style,

Song or Pattern.

NOTE

TimeSigD

The length of

one beat.

MtrVol

100

061

Metronome volume

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

You can add effects such as Harmony, Tremolo and

Echo to the Main Voice. For a list of the effects, refer

to the Harmony Type List in the separate Data List.

Press the [HARMONY] button to turn

Harmony on.

Although turning on the Harmony will select a

Harmony type suitable for the current Main Voice,

you can select a different Harmony type as

described in the following steps.

Hold down the [HARMONY] button for

longer than a second until “HarmType”

(Function 042) appears on the display.

After a few seconds, the current Harmony type

appears.

Rotate the dial to select the desired Har-

mony type.

The operation differs depending on the Harmony

type. Try playing the keyboard by referring to

“How to sound each Harmony Type” at right, and

the Harmony Type List.

Press the [HARMONY] button again to

turn Harmony off.

Adjusting the Harmony Volume

You can adjust the Harmony volume in the Function

Settings (page 60, Function 043).

Adding Harmony

Appears when the

Harmony is on.

HarmType

042

Trio

042

Current Harmony type

Hold for longer

than a second.

Playing each Harmony Type

• Harmony type 01 to 05

Press the right-hand keys while playing

chords in the Auto Accompaniment area

of the keyboard when ACMP is on (page

26).

• Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill)

Hold down two keys.

• Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo)

Keep holding

down the keys.

• Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo)

Play the keys.

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Creating Arpeggios

The Arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply pressing

the notes of the chord. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third,

and fifth—to trigger interesting phrases. This feature can be used for music production

as well as performance.

Press the [ARPEGGIO] button to turn on

the Arpeggio function.

Press a note or notes to trigger Arpeg-

gio.

The Arpeggio phrase differs depending on the

number of pressed notes and the area of the key-

board.

When Split (page 21) is on, Arpeggio is applied

only to the Split Voice. When Split is off, Arpeggio

is applied to the Main and Dual Voices. Arpeggio

cannot be applied to the Split and Main/Dual

Voices simultaneously.

To turn off the Arpeggio function, press

the [ARPEGGIO] button again.

The most suitable Arpeggio type is automatically

selected when you select a Main Voice, but you can

also select any other Arpeggio type. For a list of

available Arpeggios, refer to the Arpeggio List in the

separate Data List.

Hold down the [ARPEGGIO] button for

longer than a second to call up “ARP

Type” (Function 044).

After a few seconds, the current Arpeggio type

appears.

Rotate the dial to select the desired

Arpeggio type.

Triggering Arpeggios

• Selecting a Voice number between 262 and 301 will turn

on Arpeggio automatically.

• Selecting a Voice number between 292 and 301 will turn

on Split automatically, as well as Arpeggio. When one of

those Voices is selected, Arpeggio is applied only to the

Split Voice and is triggered only by playing a key to the

left of the Split Point.

• By assigning the Arpeggio Hold function to the foot-

switch, the Arpeggio will continue to play after the note is

released (page 49).

Appears when the

Arpeggio is on.

NOTE

Changing the Arpeggio Type

• When playing one of the Arpeggio types 117 to 150,

select a Drum Kit (Voice No.238–261) as the Main Voice.

SynArp1

004

044

Current Arpeggio type

ARP Type

044

Hold for longer

than a second.

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs

The two knobs can be used to add variations to the sound being played, transforming

the sound in a variety of musical ways. Select the desired pre-programmed function

combination printed above the knobs, then rotate the knobs, to enjoy the sound.

Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequen-

tially assign the function combinations provided: (1)

 (2)  (3)  (4)  (5)  (6)  (1) … etc. The cur-

rent combination is shown in the display.

The target differs depending on the selected number.

For details about each function, refer to page 46.

Here is an example of how to use the knobs. For

some other ideas for using the knobs, refer to page

47.

Select the desired Main Voice (page 20).

Here, select “Voice No.156 SquareLd” (Square

Lead) as a synth-lead type Voice.

Press the [ASSIGN] button several times

until z appears in the display.

Rotate knob B all the way to the right

(maximum), then play the keyboard with

your right hand while operating the

knob A with your left.

Assigning Functions to the

Knobs

Function Target

Filter

(Cutoff, Resonance)

Main Voice and Dual Voice2

Effect

(Reverb, Chorus)

(Attack, Release)

Style Filter

(Cutoff, Resonance)

Style (page 26) or Pattern (page 27)

Volume Balance/

Pattern Retrigger

Knob A: Audio input from the external

device, and Style/Pattern/

Song

Knob B: Pattern

6DSP

The DSP part selected in the Func-

tion Settings (page 60, Function 041).

• Only selecting a function combination will not affect the sound

even if the knob arrow is not at the center position. The

selected function only works when the knob is moved.

GrandPno

001

Current function

NOTE

Using the Knobs

• After selecting 1, 2 or 3 by pressing the [ASSIGN] but-

ton, changing the Voice will replace the settings cre-

ated via the knobs with the default settings of the new

Voice .

If you want to keep the settings you have created,

make sure to memorize it to Registration Memory

(page 35) before selecting a different Voice.

• Rotating a knob to the right while the volume is set to a

high level may result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce

the volume level.

Filter

Cutoff

Filter

Resonance

NOTICE

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

This instrument includes an Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate

“Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety

of Styles covering a wide range of musical genres.

Press the [STYLE] button, then use the

dial to select the desired Style.

For the Style List, refer to the separate Data List.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn

on the Auto Accompaniment (ACMP).

With this operation, the area of the keyboard to

the left of the Split Point becomes the “Auto

Accompaniment area” and is used only for speci-

fying the chords. The rhythm part as well as the

bass and chord accompaniment play back when

you play chords.

The Split Point can be changed as desired (page

53).

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

Synchro Start on.

This puts the Style playback in “standby” and

Style starts playing back when you play the key-

board.

Play a chord in the Auto Accompani-

ment area to start playback.

Play a melody with the right hand and chords with

the left hand.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop

playback.

You can easily add variations to your perfor-

mance by changing the section of the Style. For

details, refer to page 50.

With this function, you can easily call up suitable

panel settings such as Voice and Style simply by

selecting your desired music genre.

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

Both the ACMP and Synchro Start are automati-

cally turned on.

Rotate the dial to select the desired

Music Database.

This operation calls up panel settings, such as for

Voice and Style, that are registered to the

selected Music Database. For the Music Data-

base List, refer to the separate Data List.

Play the keyboard as described in steps

4–5 of the previous section.

BritRock

001

Appears when Style

mode is active.

Style Name

Style Number

Appears when the Auto

Accompaniment is on.

Auto Accompaniment

area

Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2)

036

(C1)

048

(C2)

060

(C3)

072

(C4)

084

(C5)

096

(C6)

EuTrance

057

Flashes when

sync start is on.

• For information about how to play chords, refer to pages

54 and 55.

Using the Music Database

Split Point

NOTE

Jude Hey

001

Music Database

number

Appears when Music

Database is in use.

Music Database name

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing with Patterns Like a DJ!

The Pattern playback function lets you repeatedly play various rhythm patterns, and is

particularly effective in dance music styles, such as Hip Hop, House, etc. Try out the

cool DJ-like performance features—changing keys in the left-hand area of the keyboard

and rotating the knobs for dynamic sound variations.

Press the [PATTERN] button, then use

the dial to select the desired Pattern.

ACMP is automatically turned on, and the key-

board is divided into the Auto Accompaniment

area (page 26) and melody area.

Press the [START/STOP] button to start

Pattern playback.

You can also start playback by pressing any note

in the Auto Accompaniment area.

During Pattern playback, enjoy creating sound

variations via the following operations.

 Turning on/off individual tracks via the

[TRACK CONTROL] buttons

 Changing the Section via the [A]–[E]

buttons

 Using the Retrigger function

Pattern Retrigger is a function which repeats

the first part of the current Pattern, for a rhyth-

mic break effect. For details, refer to page 52.

 Transposing playback by pressing any

note in the Auto Accompaniment area.

 Changing the sound via the Knobs

Press the [ASSIGN] button several times to

select “4 STYLE CUTOFF/STYLE RESO-

NANCE” then rotate the knobs A and B.

 Playing Arpeggios in the right-hand

area

Press the [ARPEGGIO] button to turn it on,

then press the notes in the right-hand area of

the keyboard.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop

playback.

• Up to two track buttons can be pressed simultane-

ously for turning on or off.

ChartDnc

001

Flashes

On/off status is shown in

the display (page 19)

NOTE

SECT B

• When you select a Voice between 292 and 301,

Arpeggio is applied only to the Split Voice. Playing a

key to the left of the Split Point turns Arpeggio on as

well as specifies the key for Pattern playback.

SECT B

Split Point

Specified key

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing Songs

You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of

the functions, such as Lesson.

 Song Category

The Songs are organized by category as listed below.

Press the [DEMO] button to play Demo Songs 001–

003 in sequence. Playback will repeat continuously,

starting again from the first Song (001).

To stop playback, press the [DEMO] or [ ] (Start/

Stop) button.

Press the [SONG] button, then rotate the

dial to select the desired Song.

For a list of available Songs, refer to the Song List

in the separate Data List.

You can select User Songs, Songs transferred

from a computer, and Songs in the USB flash

drive in the same way as above.

Press the [ ] (Start/Stop) button to

start playback.

To stop playback, press the [ ] (Start/Stop)

button again.

• In addition to the 30 preset Songs in this instrument, you can enjoy extra Songs downloadable from the Yamaha website. For details,

refer to page 11.

• For instructions on transferring Songs from a computer to this instrument, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “Computer-related

Operations.”

The numbers are generally assigned to the Songs in the following sequence: Songs transferred from a computer, Songs in the USB

flash drive. When you transfer a Song from a computer while the USB flash drive is connected to the instrument, the transferred Song

will be inserted before the first USB Song number, moving all USB Song numbers later in sequence.

• Gives you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument.

• Demonstrates many useful Voices of this instrument.

• These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for the Song Lesson.

• These piano ensemble pieces are also well suited for the Song Lesson.

• These songs are ideal for when you want to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns.

• Songs you record yourself (page 32).

• FLASH MEMORY: Songs transferred from a computer (page 36).

• USB: Songs in the USB flash drive (page 62).

NOTE

Listening to a Demo Song

Selecting and Playing Back a

Song

• External MIDI Songs containing the Portamento Control

and Scale Tune settings may not be played correctly.

• If playback of a Song in the USB flash drive or a Song

transferred from a computer produces the distorted

sound, decrease the Song volume (page 57) to reduce

the distortion, and then adjust the master volume (page

16).

Jeanie

013

Appears when in the

Style mode.

Song name

Song number

Each arrow mark flashes in

time with the beat.

Jeanie

013

001

Current measure

NOTE

Playing Songs

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

You can play back only a specific section of a Song

repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B

point (end point) in one-measure increments.

Start playback of the Song (page 28).

When playback reaches to the point you

want to specify as the start point, press

the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button to set

the A point.

When playback reaches to the point you

want to specify as the end point, press

the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button again to

set the B point.

The specified A-B section of the Song will now

play repeatedly.

To cancel repeat playback, press the

[ ] (A-B REPEAT) button again.

To stop playback, press the [ ] (Start/Stop)

button.

Each “track” of a Song plays a different part—melody,

percussion, accompaniment, etc. Each of the tracks

can be muted so that you can play the muted part

yourself. Pressing the desired Track button repeatedly

will toggle the on/off status.

Song Fast Forward, Fast

Reverse, and Pause

• When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast

Forward will only work within the range between A and B.

• The [ ], [ ] and [ ] buttons cannot be used for Demo

Song playback started by using the [DEMO] button.

Playing a Specified Section of a

Song Repeatedly (A-B Repeat)

[] Fast Reverse

During playback,

press this button to

rapidly return to an

earlier point in the

Song.

[] Fast Forward

During playback, press this

button to rapidly skip ahead

to a later point in the Song.

[] Pause

During playback,

press this button to

pause playback, and

press again to start

from that point.

NOTE

• If you want to set start point “A” to the top of the Song,

press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button before starting

playback.

• If you want to set end point “B” to the end of the Song,

specify only the A point and play back the Song to the

end.

Turning Each Track On/Off

• Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for

turning on or off.

NOTE

Track number off—Track is

muted or contains no data

Track number on—Track will

be played back

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Using the Song Lesson Feature

You can use the selected Song for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Try

practicing with these three Song Lesson types while referring to the music scores in

the Song Book downloaded from the website (page 11).

Lesson Types

 Lesson 1 (LISTEN): You do not need to play the keyboard. The model melody/chords of the selected part

will sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it as best as you can.

 Lesson 2 (TIMING): Simply concentrate on playing the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play

wrong notes, the correct notes will sound.

 Lesson 3 (WAITING): Try playing the correct notes shown on the display. The Song pauses until you play

the right note, and playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing.

Select the desired Song for your lesson

(page 28).

Turn off the part you want to practice.

For the right-hand lesson, press the [1/RIGHT]

button to turn off the right-hand part. For the left-

hand lesson, press the [2/LEFT] button to turn off

the left-hand part. For lessons using both hands,

turn off both parts.

Pressing one of the TRACK CONTROL buttons

repeatedly will toggle the on/off status of each

part, which can be shown on the display.

Press the [LESSON] button to start play-

back of the Song.

Pressing the [LESSON] button repeatedly will

change the lesson number from 1: LISTEN  2:

TIMING  3: WAITING  off  1…. Press this

button until the desired number is shown on the

display.

To stop the lesson, press the [ ] (Start/Stop)

button.

Even during playback, you can change the lesson

number by pressing the [LESSON] button.

When Song playback reaches to the

end, check your evaluation Grade on the

display.

In lesson 2 (TIMING) and 3 (WAITING), when the

Song reaches to the end, your performance will

be evaluated in four levels: “Excellent!”, “Very

Good!”, “Good”, “OK”. “Excellent!” is the highest

evaluation.

After the evaluation display is shown, the lesson

will start again from the beginning.

• If you want to maintain a steady playback tempo during Lesson 3, change the parameter in the Function Settings (page 61, Function

064).

NOTE

• The Song Lesson can be applied to Songs transferred

from a computer, and Songs in USB flash drive. How-

ever, some of the Lesson functions may not be applied

to some Songs due to the structure of the Song data.

• The Song Lesson cannot be applied to the User Songs

and the Songs other than SMF format 0.

NOTE

ForElise

015

Track 1 is unlit

Track 2 is unlit

Track 1 and 2

are unlit

Right-hand

lesson

Left-hand

lesson

Both-hands

lesson

TIMING

Lp2

007

The notation and

key positions you

should play are

shown.

In lesson 2, both-hands les-

son is indicated as “LR2,”

right-hand lesson is indi-

cated as “R2” and left-hand

lesson is indicated as “L2.”

~~~~~~~~ Excellent!

~~~~~~ Very Good!

~~~~ Good

~~ OK

Using the Song Lesson Feature

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

If you want to practice a specific section in which you

made a mistake or you have difficulty with, use the

Repeat & Learn function.

Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button

during a lesson.

The Song position will move back four measures, a

one-measure count will play, then Song playback will

start again. Playback of the four measures will repeat

with a one-measure count-in.

To exit from this status, press this button again.

Making Practice Perfect—

Repeat & Learn

• You can change the amount of measures the Repeat & Learn

function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] dur-

ing repeat playback.

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Recording Your Performance

You can record up to 10 of your performances to the instrument as User Songs. The

recorded User Songs can be played back in the same way as the preset Songs.

A Song can be recorded to the six tracks. You can

record without specifying tracks, but you can also

record each track one by one (e.g., only the right-

hand part or the left-hand part) to create a complete

piece which may be difficult to play at once.

 Melody Tracks [1/RIGHT]–[5]

The melody performance will be recorded.

 Accompaniment Track [A]

The chord progression (for the Style) or the key

change (for the Pattern) will be recorded.

This section explains how to record without specify-

ing a track. This is useful when you record a new

Song from scratch.

Make the desired settings including the

Main Voice selection.

Make the desired settings of your perfor-

mance.

• If you want to record only the melody performance, press

the [SONG] button.

• If you want to record the performance using a Style, press

the [STYLE] button.

• If you want to record the performance using a Pattern,

press the [PATTERN] button.

Press the [REC] button to enter the

Record Ready mode.

This operation selects the lowest-numbered unre-

corded User Song from 031–040 (User 1–10) as

the recording target.

Track 1 will be selected as recording target of the

melody, and the Track A will be selected as

recording target of the accompaniment part (the

chord progression for the Style or the key change

for the Pattern) automatically. If a User Song was

selected beforehand, recording data will overwrite

Tracks 1 and A of the selected Song.

To exit from this status, press the [REC] button

again.

Start recording.

• When you press the [SONG] button in step 2, play any note

to start recording.

• When you select a Style in step 2, play a chord in the Auto

Accompaniment area to start recording with Style play-

back, or press the [START/STOP] button to start recording

only with playback of the Rhythm part of a Style.

• When you select a Pattern in step 2, play a key in the

Accompaniment area or press the [START/STOP] button to

start recording with Pattern playback.

The current measure will be shown on the display

while recording.

Press the [ ] (Start/Stop) or [REC] but-

ton to stop recording.

When using a Style, you can stop recording also

by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button, and

then waiting until playback ends.

• This instrument records your performance and save it in an original format. If you want MIDI data, convert it to SMF by saving it to the

connected USB flash drive (page 65).

NOTE

Track Structure of a Song

Quick Recording

Melody Tracks

Accompani-

ment Track

• The ACMP on/off status cannot be changed after the

[REC] button is pressed.

User 1

001

pEC

Flashes

NOTE

User 1

003

pEC

Current measure number

Recording Your Performance

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

After recording finishes, “Writing!” appears indi-

cating that the recorded data is being stored, and

then the recorded track numbers in the display

will light.

To play back the recorded Song, press

the [ ] (Start/Stop) button.

This section explains how to record to a specified

track. This is useful when you want to record the

additional performances to an already recorded

Song, or re-record only one track of an already

recorded Song.

Press the [SONG] button, and then select

the desired User Song from 031–040

(User 1–10) as the recording target.

While holding down the [REC] button,

press the desired Track button to enter

the Record Ready mode.

 If you want to record only the melody:

While holding down the [REC] button, press

one of the [1/RIGHT]–[5] buttons.

 If you want to record only the Style play-

back:

Press the [STYLE] button, select the desired

Style, then simultaneously hold down the

[REC] button and press the [A] button. ACMP

is automatically turned on.

• Never attempt to turn the power off when “Writing!” is

shown in the display. Doing so can result in a loss of

data.

•

When recording Pattern playback with Retrigger

Note that the beat indicator in the display, metronome

and Arpeggio playback are not synchronized with play-

back of the recorded Song.

Limitations while recording

• The on/off status of ACMP cannot be changed.

• Playback cannot be changed between Style and Pat-

tern.

• The Pattern number can be changed while the Style

number cannot.

• When you use a Style/Pattern, the following parame-

ters cannot be changed: Reverb Type, Chorus Type,

Time Signature, Style number and Style/Pattern Vol-

ume.

• Performance with a Split Voice cannot be recorded.

• The audio input from an external device (playback

sound on the connected computer or audio device)

cannot be recorded.

NOTICE

NOTE

Recording to a Specified Track

User 1

031

User 1

001

pEC

Selected track

flashes

Flashes

Press and hold

Recording Your Performance

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

 If you want to record only the Pattern

playback:

Press the [PATTERN] button, then select the

desired Pattern. While holding down the [REC]

button, press the [A] button. ACMP is automat-

ically turned on.

Same as in steps 4 to 6 (page 32) in

“Quick Recording.”

You can clear all tracks of a User Song.

Press the [SONG] button, then select the

User Song from 031–040 (User 1–10) to

be cleared.

Hold down the track [1/RIGHT] and [A]

buttons simultaneously for longer than

a second.

A confirmation message will appear on the dis-

play.

Press the [+/YES] button.

A confirmation message will appear on the dis-

play. To cancel this operation, press the [-] button.

Press the [+/YES] button to clear the

Song.

A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly

on the display.

This lets you clear individual tracks from a User

Song.

Press the [SONG] button, and then

select the desired User Song from 031–

040 (User 1–10).

From [1/RIGHT]–[5] and [A], press the

Track button to be cleared for longer

than a second.

A confirmation message will appear on the dis-

play.

Press the [+/YES] button.

A confirmation message will appear on the dis-

play.To cancel this operation, press the [-] button.

Press the [+/YES] button to clear the

track.

A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly

on the display.

• If the memory becomes full while recording, an alert

message will appear and recording will stop automati-

cally. In this case, delete unnecessary data by using the

Clear functions (below), then execute the recording

again.

Clearing a User Song

Press and hold

NOTE

Hold simultaneously

for longer than a second.

ClrUser1

YES

Clearing a Specified Track from

a User Song

Hold for longer than

a second.

ClrTr1

YES

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Memorizing Your Favorite Settings (Registration Memory)

The Registration Memory function allows

you to save (or “register”) panel settings

such as Voice and Style to a Registration

Memory button, and then instantly recall

your custom panel settings by simply press-

ing a single button. The registered settings

for four Registration Memory buttons will be

saved as a single Bank.

Make the desired settings, such as

those for Voice, Style, and Pattern.

Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY

[BANK/MEMORY] button to call up a Bank

number on the display.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select a Bank number.

While holding down the [BANK/MEM-

ORY] button, press one of the [1]–[4]

buttons to memorize the current panel

settings.

A “Writing!” message appears indicating that the

panel settings will be stored.

Press and release the [BANK/MEMORY]

button to call up a Bank number on the

display.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select a Bank number.

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEM-

ORY [1]–[4] buttons to call up the panel

settings you memorized.

The recalled Registration Memory number

appears in the display for a few seconds.

Up to 32 settings (eight banks of four each) can

be memorized.

Memory 1

8 Banks

Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4

Memorizing Panel Settings to

the Registration Memory

• Data cannot be saved to the Registration Memory during

Song playback.

• If you select a Registration Memory number that

already contains data, the previous data is deleted

and overwritten by the new data.

• Never attempt to turn the power off when “Writing!” is

shown in the display. Doing so can result in a loss of

data.

NOTE

Bank

Bank number

Press and

hold

NOTICE

Recalling Panel Settings from

the Registration Memory

• When the [SONG] lamp is lit, the Style or Pattern settings

will not be recalled even if you press the REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY button to which the Style or Pattern set-

tings are memorized. To recall Style/Pattern settings,

make sure to press the [STYLE] or [PATTERN] button

beforehand.

Parameters that can be memorized to Registra-

tion Memory

 Style settings: Style number, ACMP on/off, Style vol-

ume, Track on/off, Main section A/B, Tempo

 Pattern settings: Pattern number, Pattern volume, Sec-

tion, Track on/off, Tempo

 Voice settings:

Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of the

related Functions (page 58)

Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the

related Functions

Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the

related Functions

 Effect settings: Reverb Type, Chorus Type

 Arpeggio settings: Arpeggio on/off and all settings of

the related Functions

 Harmony settings: Harmony on/off and all settings of

the related Functions

 DSP: Parameter values of Knobs A/B and settings of the

related Functions

 Other settings: Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob

Effect Combination number, Split Point, Scale Tune

REGIST 1

Registration

Memory number

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Connecting to Other Devices

By connecting an audio device such as a portable

music player to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, you

can output the sound of the audio device through the

built-in speakers of this instrument. This lets you play

the keyboard along with the playback of your audio

player.

Connect the headphone jack of an audio

device to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack

by using an audio cable.

Turn on the audio device, and then this

instrument.

Start play back of the connected audio

device.

The sound of the audio device is output through

the speakers of this instrument.

Adjust the volume balance between the

audio device and this instrument.

Adjust the audio playback volume on the audio

device, then adjust the entire volume by rotating

the [MASTER VOLUME] control of the instru-

ment.

Play the keyboard along with the sound

of audio device.

After finishing the performance, stop

playback of the audio device.

Connecting the [USB TO HOST] terminal of this

instrument and the computer via a USB cable allows

you to transmit/receive MIDI and Audio data to/from

the computer. For details on using a computer with

this instrument, refer to the online PDF manual (page

11) “Computer-related Operations.”

• Before connecting the instrument to external devices, turn off the power of all the devices. Also, before turning the power on or

off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum. Otherwise, damage to the devices or electrical shock may occur.

CAUTION

Playing an External Audio

Device with the Built-in

Speakers

• To avoid damage to the devices, first turn on the power to

the external device, and then to the instrument. When turn-

ing off the power, first turn off the power to the instrument,

and then to the external device.

• If you are using a computer or a smart device such as an

iPhone/iPad, you can also connect it to the [USB TO

HOST] terminal (see “Connecting to a Computer,” at

right).

NOTICE

Stereo mini plug

Audio device (portable

music player, etc.)

Headphone

jack

Audio cable

Stereo mini plug

NOTE

• If you want to adjust the volume balance between the

audio input from the external device and Song/Style/Pat-

tern, use the [ASSIGN] button to select Function number

5, then turn Knob A (page 46).

The audio input volume from the [AUX IN] jack can also

be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function

004). If you increase the volume to more than 50, the

audio device sound may be distorted.

• You can cancel or lower the volume of the melody part of

audio playback. For details, refer to page 37.

Connecting to a Computer

NOTE

USB cable

USB

terminal

Instrument

Computer

[USB TO HOST]

terminal

Connecting to Other Devices

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

You can use a smart device, such as an iPhone or

iPad, with the instrument for a variety of musical pur-

poses by connecting it to the instrument’s [USB TO

HOST] terminal. For details on connections, refer to

the online PDF manual (page 11) “iPhone/iPad Con-

nection Manual.” For information about the compati-

ble smart devices and application tools, access the

following page:

http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/

When you output the audio sound of an external

audio device or a computer connected to the [AUX

IN] jack or the [USB TO HOST] terminal through this

instrument, you can cancel or lower the volume of the

melody part of audio playback. You can use the func-

tion to practice the melody part along with the audio

playback.

Play back audio on the connected exter-

nal device.

Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-

ton to turn it on.

Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-

ton again to turn it off.

Files that can be transferred from a computer

to this instrument (and vice versa).

• Song file: .mid (SMF format 0/1)

• Style file: .sty

• Backup file: PSR-E453.BUP* (PSR-E453)/

PSREW400.BUP* (PSR-EW400)

* Backup parameters (page 39) can be transferred and

saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single

file.

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0

cables cannot be used.

• If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this

instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 60) to OFF. Oth-

erwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the settings

of the computer or the application software.

• The volume can be adjusted on the computer, and also by

using the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] control. If you

want to adjust the volume balance between the audio input

from the external device and Song/Style/Pattern, use the

[ASSIGN] button to select Function number 5, then turn Knob

A (page 46).

The audio input volume from the [USB TO HOST] terminal can

also be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function

005).

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad

• If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this

instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 60) to OFF. Oth-

erwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the settings

of the computer or the application software.

• Up to 256 Song files can be transferred to this instru-

ment.

• If you transfer a Style file from the computer to this

instrument, you need to load it to this instrument for Style

playback. For details, refer to “Loading a Style File”

(page 67).

NOTE

NOTICE

NOTE

NOTICE

• The volume can be adjusted on the smart device, and also by

using the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] control. If you

want to adjust the volume balance between the audio input

from the external device and Song/Style/Pattern, use the

[ASSIGN] button to select Function number 5, then turn Knob

A (page 46).

The audio input volume from the [USB TO HOST] terminal can

also be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function

005).

Using the Melody Suppressor

• Depending on the particular music source, the melody

or vocal sound may not be cancelled as expected even

when if the Melody Suppressor is turned on. In such a

case, try adjusting the pan position to be cancelled in

the Function Settings (page 59, Function 039).

• When the instrument is connected to the [USB TO

HOST] terminal, and Audio Loop Back (page 60, Func-

tion 058) is set to OFF, the Melody Suppressor function

cannot be used.

NOTE

MelodySP

NOTE

Connecting to Other Devices

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

You can connect a stereo system to amplify the

instrument’s sound by using the OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R]

jacks.

You can use the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME]

dial to adjust the volume of the sound output to the

external device.

You can set whether the sound of this instrument is

always output from its built-in speaker or not.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “SP Mute” (Function 067).

Use the dial to select the desired setting.

When Speaker Mute set to “ON,” the Speaker

sound is off. You can only hear the instrument

sound via the headphones or an external device

connected to the [OUTPUT] jacks.

When Speaker Mute set to “OFF,” the speaker

sound is always on as long as headphones are

not connected.

Using an External Stereo

System for Playback (OUTPUT

[L/L+R]/[R] jacks) (PSR-EW400)

• Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resis-

tance.

• Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural

device.

• To avoid possible damage, first turn on the power to the

instrument, then to the external device. When turning off

the power, first turn off the power to the external device,

then to the instrument. Since this instrument’s power may

automatically be turned off due to the Auto Power Off func-

tion (page 16), turn off the power to the external device, or

disable Auto Power Off when you do not intend to operate

the instrument.

• Do not route the output from the OUTPUT jacks to the

[AUX IN] jack. If you make this connection, the signal input

at the [AUX IN] jack is output from the [OUTPUT] jacks and

then back again, creating a feedback loop that could make

normal performance impossible, and may even damage

the equipment.

Phone plug

(standard)

Audio cable

Phone plug

(standard)

Input jack

Powered speaker

Audio signal

NOTE

NOTICE

Speaker Mute On/Off Setting

(PSR-EW400)

SP Mute

OFF

067

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Backup and Initialization

The following Backup parameters will be maintained

even if the power is turned off.

In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the

data (including Style data that have not been loaded)

transferred from the connected computer will be

maintained even if you turn off the power.

You can erase the backup parameters described

above, and then restores all the default factory set-

tings.

You can initialize the instrument via the following two

methods.

Backup Clear

This operation initializes the backup parameters.

While holding down the highest white key, press the

[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.

Flash Clear

This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that

have been transferred from a computer. Note that

Style data loaded to Style numbers 221–230 will be

maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest

white key and the three highest black keys, press the

[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.

Backup Parameters

Backup parameters

• User Songs (page 32)

• Style data transferred from a computer and loaded to

Style numbers 221–230 (page 67)

• Registration Memory (page 35)

• FUNCTION Settings: (page 58)

Tuning, Split Point, Touch Response, Style Volume,

Song Volume, Pattern Volume, Metronome Volume,

Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Master EQ type,

Audio Loop Back on/off, Your Tempo on/off, Auto

Power Off Time, Battery Type, Language

Initializing the Instrument

• Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you

have purchased. Be sure to save important data to a com-

puter. For details, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11)

“Computer-related Operations.”

PSR-EW400

PSR-E453

The highest white key

PSR-EW400

PSR-E453

The highest white key

and the three highest

black keys

NOTICE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Handy Performance Features

Selecting a Reverb Type

The Reverb effect lets you play with a rich concert

hall type ambience.

Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the

optimum Reverb type for the entire sound, you can

select a different Reverb type manually.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Reverb” (Function 036).

After a few seconds, the current Reverb type

appears.

Rotate the dial to select a Reverb type.

Play the keyboard to check the sound. For infor-

mation about the available Reverb types, refer to

the Effect Type List in the separate Data List.

Selecting a Chorus Type

The Chorus effect creates a thick sound that sounds

like many of the same Voices being played in unison.

Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the

optimum Chorus type for the entire sound, you can

select a different Chorus type manually.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Chorus” (Function 037).

After a few seconds, the current Chorus type

appears.

Rotate the dial to select a Chorus type.

Play the keyboard to check the sound. For infor-

mation about the available Chorus types, refer to

the Effect Type List in the separate Data List.

• Some Songs and Styles use Reverb Types which cannot

be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style

is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display.

Adjusting the Reverb depth

You can adjust the Reverb depth applied to the

Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the

same operations above. Regarding the item in step

2, refer to the Function List on page 59.

Reverb

036

Hall2

036

Current Reverb type

NOTE

• Some Songs and Styles use Chorus Types which cannot

be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style

is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display.

Adjusting the Chorus depth

You can adjust the Chorus depth applied to the

Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the

same operations above. Regarding the item in step

2, refer to the Function List on page 59.

Chorus

037

Chorus1

037

Current Chorus type

NOTE

Reference

Handy Performance Features

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Pitch Controls—Transpose

The overall pitch of the instrument (except for the

Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down by a

maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments.

Press the [TRANSPOSE] button to call

up “Transpos” (Function 006).

Use the dial to set the Transpose value

between -12 and +12.

Pitch Controls—Fine Tuning

The overall tuning of the instrument (except for the

Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down between

427.0 Hz and 453.0 Hz in approximately 0.2 Hz incre-

ments. The default value is 440.0 Hz.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Tuning” (Function 007).

Use the dial to set the Tuning value.

Pitch Controls—the [PITCH

BEND] wheel

The [PITCH BEND] wheel can be used to add

smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the key-

board. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or

downward to lower the pitch.

You can change the amount of pitch bend produced

by the wheel in the Function Settings (page 58, Func-

tion 008).

Calling Up Optimum Panel

Settings—One Touch Setting

(OTS)

Select a Song, Style or Pattern by pressing the

[SONG], [STYLE] or [PATTERN] button, then select

Voice number 000 OTS (page 20). This lets you auto-

matically call up the optimum panel settings such as

Voice and tempo for the current Song, Style or Pat-

tern.

Transpos

006

Tuning

007

440.0Hz

007

Handy Performance Features

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Changing the Touch Response of

the Keyboard

The keyboard of this instrument is equipped with a

Touch Response feature that lets you dynamically

and expressively control the level of the Voices

according to your playing strength.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “TouchRes” (Function 010).

After a few seconds, the current Touch Response

appears.

Use the dial to select a Touch Response

setting between 1 and 4.

Touch Response

Selecting an EQ Setting for the

Best Sound

Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you

the best possible sound when listening through differ-

ent reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal

speakers, headphones, or an external speaker sys-

tem.

Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR]

button for longer than a second to call

up “Master EQ” (Function 038).

After a few seconds, the current Master EQ type

appears.

Rotate the dial to select the desired Mas-

ter EQ type.

Master EQ types

1Soft

Allows maximum loudness to be pro-

duced with relatively light key pres-

sure.

2Medium

Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard

response.

3Hard

Requires that the keys be played quite

hard to produce maximum loudness.

4Fixed

All notes are produced at the same

volume no matter how hard the key-

board is played.

TouchRes

010

Medium

010

Current Touch

Response

1 Speaker

Optimum for listening via the instru-

ment’s built-in speakers.

2 Headphone

Optimum for headphones, or for listen-

ing via external speakers.

3Boost

Features more powerful sound.

Depending on the selected Voice and

Style, etc., the sound may be more

subject to distortion than other EQ

types.

4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance.

5Bright

Lowers the mid range for a brighter

sound.

6 Mild

Lowers the high range for a softer

sound.

MasterEQ

038

Speaker

038

Current Master EQ

type

Hold for longer

than a second.

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Scale Tuning

By default, the scale of this keyboard is set to Equal Temperament — the same tuning

as with any acoustic piano. However, the setting can be changed to any other scale

according to the music genre or music style you want to play.

Selecting a Scale

You can select a desired scale among the various

preset scales.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button to

call up “Scale” (Function 048).

After a few seconds, the current scale appears.

Rotate the dial to select a scale.

The default setting is “1 Equal.”

Preset Scale types

Setting the Base Note for Each

Scale

Please make sure to specify the appropriate base

note, if you select a scale other than Equal Tempera-

ment, or create an original scale via Scale Tune func-

tion.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button to

call up “BaseNote” (Function 049).

After a few seconds, the current base note

appears.

Rotate the dial to select a base note

from C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb

and B.

The default setting is “C.”

1 Equal

2 Pure Major

3 Pure Minor

4Bayat (Arabic)

5 Rast (Arabic)

Scale

048

Equal

048

Current scale

BaseNote

049

Current base note

Scale Tuning

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Tuning Each Note to Create an

Original Scale

You can tune the individual notes in cents (a “cent” is

1/100th of a semitone) to create your original scale.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “TuneNote” (Function 050).

After a few seconds, the current note appears.

Rotate the dial to select the note to be

tuned from C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab,

A, Bb, B.

Press the CATEGORY [+] button to call

up “Tune” (Function 051).

After a few seconds, the tuning value of the note

selected in step 3 appears.

Rotate the dial to tune the note over a

range of -64 to +63.

The setting can be reset to the initial default value

by pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simul-

taneously.

Repeat steps 2–5 as desired.

Memorize the settings here to the Regis-

tration Memory as desired (page 35).

TuneNote

050

Current tuning note

Tune C

051

Tune

051

Tun i n g v al u e

• When pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simulta-

neously after recalling an original scale memorized to

Registration Memory, the scale will return to the original

scale registered to Registration Memory, not to the

default tune value.

• When calling up “Scale” (Function 048) after using indi-

vidual note scale tuning, “(Edited)” will be shown in the

display. However, the edited scale settings will be

erased by calling up another scale. For this reason, the

edited settings should be memorized to the Registration

Memory.

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Voice Settings

Selecting a Dual Voice

Hold down the [DUAL] button for longer

than a second to call up “D.Voice”

(Function 020).

After a few seconds, the current Dual Voice

appears.

Rotate the dial to select the desired Dual

Voice .

Selecting a Split Voice

Hold down the [SPLIT] button for longer

than a second to call up “S.Voice”

(Function 030).

After a few seconds, the current Split Voice

appears.

Rotate the dial to select the desired Split

Voice .

Voice Editing

For each of the Main, Dual and Split Voices, you can

edit the parameters such as volume, octave and

depth of the Reverb and Chorus, allowing you to cre-

ate new, custom sounds that best suit your musical

needs.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up the desired item.

Voice parameters are indicated as below.

• Main Voice parameters: M.****** (Function

011–019)

• Dual Voice parameters: D.****** (Function

020–029)

• Split Voice parameters: S.****** (Function

030–035)

For details on each parameter, refer to the Func-

tion List on page 59.

Rotate the dial to set the value.

Check the sound by playing the keyboard.

Repeat steps 2–3 above to edit various

parameters.

If necessary, memorize the settings to

the Registration Memory (page 35).

The Voice-related settings are reset when a differ-

ent Voice is selected. If you want to store the cre-

ated sound for future recall, memorize the

settings to the Registration Memory.

D.Voice

020

Chamber

071

020

Current Dual Voice

Hold for longer

than a second.

S.Voice

030

FngrBass

054

030

Current Split Voice

Hold for longer

than a second.

M.Volume

064

011

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Parameters Assigned to the Knobs

This section describes each of the parameters which can be assigned to the Knobs (page 25).

z Filter

Filter effects shape the sound by allowing only a

specified range of frequencies to pass and/or by pro-

ducing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” fre-

quency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of

synthesizer-like sounds.

 Knob A: CUTOFF

Adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the

brightness of the sound. Turning the knob to the left

makes the sound more muffled or darker, while turn-

ing the knob A to the right makes the sound brighter.

 Knob B: RESONANCE

Adjusts the amount of Resonance applied at the fil-

ter’s cutoff frequency. Turning the knob to the right will

increases the Resonance to emphasize the frequen-

cies at the cutoff frequency, and thus “strengthens”

the perceived effect of the filter.

x Effect



Knob A: REVERB

Reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall

or club. Turning the knob to the right increases the

Reverb depth.

 Knob B: CHORUS

Produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect. Turning

the knob to the right increases the Chorus depth.

c EG (Envelope Generator)

Envelope Generator effects determine how the level

of the sound varies over time. You can make the

attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower

for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can

lengthen or shorten the sustain to best match the

music you’re playing.

 Knob A: ATTACK

Adjusts the Attack Time (the amount of time it takes

the sound to reach maximum level when a key is

played). Turning the knob to the right increases the

Attack Time, thus slowing down the attack rate.

 Knob B: RELEASE

Adjusts the Release Time (the amount of time it

takes for the sound to decay to silence after a key is

released). Turning the knob to the right increases the

Release Time, thus making a longer sustain.

v Style Filter

Same as z. These effects are applied only to Style

or Pattern playback.

b Volume Balance/Pattern Retrigger



Knob A: VOLUME BALANCE

Adjusts the volume balance between the audio play-

back volume from the connected audio device (page

36) or the computer (page 36) and the Song/Style/

Pattern. Turning the knob to the left decreases the

external audio volume, while turning it to the right

decreases the instrument volume.

• These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played

on the keyboard.

• Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass fre-

quencies.

NOTE

Level

Frequency

Cutoff Frequency

Frequencies in this

range are passed.

Frequencies in this

range are cut off.

Level

Frequency

Resonance

• These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played

on the keyboard.

• These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played

on the keyboard.

NOTE

Sustain Level

Level

Time

Key Played Key Released

ATTACK DECAY RELEASE

NOTE

Parameters Assigned to the Knobs

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Even when there is no audio input from an external

device, the volume of Song, Style and Pattern can be

adjusted by using the knob. The volume of Voices

played on the keyboard cannot be adjusted.

 Knob B: RETRIGGER RATE

Adjusts the Retrigger Rate (the length of the part to

be repeated) of the Pattern Retrigger function (page

52). Turning this knob to the right decreases it, and

turning the knob to the left increases it.

n DSP



Knob A/B: DSP PARAMETER A/B

With the digital effects built into the instrument, you

can add DSP effects to your keyboard performance

and the playback sound of Style, etc. (page 48).

Each effect has two parameters which are assigned

to Knobs A and B. By turning the knobs in real-time,

you can alter the music in various dynamic ways,

such as changing the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the

rotary speaker or changing the degree of the Distor-

tion.

The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects that can be assigned to the knobs.

Some Ideas for Using the Knobs

• When the instrument is connected to the [USB TO HOST] ter-

minal, and Audio Loop Back (page 60, Function 058) is set to

OFF, you cannot adjust the volume of audio playback input

from the external device.

• When setting the tempo of the Pattern playback to more than

200, turning the knob to the right cannot change the length to

be repeated.

NOTE

Number/Effect Try This

Filter

Select “143 Gemini” (a synth-lead type Voice) or “170 Noise” (page 20). Turning Knobs A

or B while playing gives you the dynamic filter-sweep effects of an analog synthesizer.

Effect

Select the Voice “008 CP80.” Turn Knobs A and B all the way down to hear the direct,

unprocessed sound of the Voice. As you turn Knob B toward the right, a Chorus effect

with modulation is gradually applied to the sound. Turning Knob A to the right adds a

Reverb effect that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall.

Select the Voice “173 RSAnPad.” Turning Knob A all the way down makes the attack

faster, and lets you hear the crisp, clear sound of the original Voice. Turning Knob B all

the way down shortens the amount of time for the sound to decay to silence after a key is

released. These knobs let you finely adjust the Voice to create the appropriate sound for

the particular song you’re playing.

Style Filter

Select the Style, “057 EuTrance.” Turn on the [ACMP ON/OFF] button and start Style

playback (page 26). Set Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The

overall sound of the style should be a bit muffled compared to the original, with the

drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact.

Volume Balance/

Pattern Retrigger

Knob A: Connect an audio device or a computer (page 36), then turn this knob while

playing audio on the external device. You can adjust the volume balance between the

performance on this instrument and the audio input.

Knob B: Select the Section C of the Pattern “002 FrenchDJ” and start Pattern playback.

Turn this knob to the right while holding down the Section button C, and you can pro-

gressively shorten the Retrigger rate like a DJ would in performance.

DSP

Select the Voice, “019 Cool!Org.” Press the [DSP] button to turn the DSP on, then set the

DSP type (Function 040) to “01 RotarySp,” and the DSP part (Function 041) to “1 Key-

board” (page 60). Adjust the effect depth by turning Knob B while playing the keyboard,

then use Knob A to change the rotating speed of the rotary speaker. When you move it

slowly, you can create gradual speed changes like on a real rotary speaker.

Parameters Assigned to the Knobs

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Adding DSP Effects

DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Pro-

cessor. DSP effects are applied only to a specified

part as described below.

Parts to which DSP effects are applied

Press the [DSP] button to turn DSP on.

Although turning on DSP will select a DSP type

suitable for the current panel setting, you can

select a different DSP type as described in the

following steps.

Hold down the [DSP] button for longer

than a second to call up “DSP Type”

(Function 040).

After a few seconds, the current DSP type

appears.

Rotate the dial to select a DSP type.

For information about the available DSP types,

refer to the Effect Type List in the Data List.

Press the CATEGORY [+] button once to

call up “DSP Part” (Function 041).

After a few seconds, the current part to which the

DSP effects are applied appears.

Rotate the dial to select a part to which

the DSP effects are applied.

Refer to the chart of “Parts to which DSP effects

are applied” (see left), and select “Keyboard” or

“Style.”

Press the [ASSIGN] button several times

to assign Function 6 to the knobs (page

25).

Turn the knobs while playing the part

selected in step 5 to see how the DSP

effects change.

Press the [DSP] button again to turn

DSP off.

DSP part: Keyboard

• Main Voice

• Dual Voice

• Track 1 of a User Song

 When selecting the “Keyboard” part for DSP

DSP

• ON/OFF

• Type

DSP part: Style

• Style

• Pattern

• Track A of a User Song

 When selecting the “Style” part for DSP

Output

DSP part: Keyboard

• Main Voice

• Dual Voice

• Track 1 of a User Song

DSP

• ON/OFF

• Type

DSP part: Style

• Style

• Pattern

• Track A of a User Song

This parameter is set in step 5.

Appears when

the DSP is on.

DSP Type

040

RotarySp

040

Current DSP type

Hold for longer

than a second.

Limitations when recording a Song

• DSP effects can be recorded only to Tracks 1

and A.

• The DSP type and part cannot be changed

while recording.

• When recording to an existing User Song, if the

part to which the DSP effects are applied differs

from the recording tracks, DSP related setting

data (DSP part, type, parameter A/B) will not

be recorded or overwritten.

• The DSP effects may not be applied as

expected when a User Song is being played

back. This is because the DSP effects are

affected by the data recorded to the User Song.

DSP Part

041

Keyboard

041

Current Part

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Arpeggio Settings

Synchronizing an Arpeggio to

Song/Style/Pattern Playback—

Arpeggio Quantize

When you play the keyboard to trigger an Arpeggio

(page 24) along with Song/Style/Pattern playback,

you’ll need to play the notes with correct timing to

keep the Arpeggio in synchronization with the other

playback tracks. However, your actual timing may be

slightly ahead of or behind the beat (or both). The

“Arpeggio Quantize” function of this instrument will

correct any slight imperfections in the timing (accord-

ing to settings below), and then play back the Arpeg-

gio appropriately.

• Synchronizing to quarter notes

• Synchronizing to 8th notes

• No synchronization

Although the Arpeggio Quantize value is pre-pro-

grammed for each Arpeggio Type, you can change

the value manually.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Quantize” (Function 046).

After a few seconds, the current Arpeggio Quan-

tize value appears.

Rotate the dial to select a value from

“OFF,” “1/8” and “1/16.”

• 1/8 Synchronizing to quarter notes

• 1/16 Synchronizing to 8th notes

• OFF No synchronization

Holding the Arpeggio Playback

via the Footswitch

You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback

continues even after the note has been released, by

pressing the footswitch connected to the [SUSTAIN]

jack.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Pdl Func” (Function 047).

After a few seconds, the current pedal setting

appears.

Rotate the dial to select “Arp Hold.”

If you want to restore the footswitch function to

sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both

hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.”

Try playing Arpeggio with the foot-

switch.

Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then

press the footswitch. Even if you release the

notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop

Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch.

Quantize

046

1/8

046

Current value

Pdl Func

047

Sustain

047

Current setting

Arp Hold

047

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Style and Pattern Settings

Style Variations—Sections

Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the

song you are playing.

INTRO

This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the Intro finishes, Style playback shifts to the Main section.

The length of the Intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

MAIN

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. Playback of the Main section repeats indefinitely until

another Section’s button is pressed. There are two variations (A and B), and the Style playback sound

changes harmonically in response on the chords you play with your left hand.

AUTO FILL

This is automatically added before changing to Main A or B.

ENDING

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the Ending finishes, the Style playback stops automatically.

The length of the Ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Press the [STYLE] button, then rotate

the dial to select a Style.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn

ACMP on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

Synchro Start on.

To turn off Synchro Start, press the [SYNC

START] button.

 Synchro Start

When Synchro Start is on, Style playback will

begin as soon as you play a chord in the Auto

Accompaniment area of the keyboard.

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to

select Main A or Main B.

INTRO MAIN A/B

ENDING AUTO FILL

Appears when ACMP

is turned on.

Beat arrows

flash.

MAIN A

Current Section

(Main A or B)

Style and Pattern Settings

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Now, you’re ready to start Style playback of the

Intro and then the Main A (or B) section.

Play a chord with your left hand to start

playback of the Intro.

For information on how to play chords, see

“Chords” on page 54.

After the Intro finishes, play the key-

board according to the progression of

the Song you are playing.

Play chords with your left hand while playing mel-

odies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/

AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will

change to Fill-in then Main A or B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

The Section switches to the Ending. When the

Ending is finished, Style playback stops automati-

cally. You can have the Ending gradually slow

down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/END-

ING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing

back.

Style Synchro Stop

When you press the [SYNC STOP] button to turn on

this function, the Style will only play while pressing

chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the key-

board. Releasing all the notes will stop Style play-

back.

Turning Each Style Track On/Off

As printed on the front panel, a Style consists of six

tracks. Turn on/off each track via the TRACK CON-

TROL buttons. Each of the tracks can be muted so

that you can play the muted part yourself. Pressing

the desired Track button repeatedly will toggle the on/

off status.

• Style numbers 196, 208–220 have no rhythm parts, so no

rhythm will play. When one of these Styles is selected, turn

ACMP on, then specify the chord in the left hand area to play

Style parts other than the Rhythm part.

INTRO≥A

Split Point

Auto Accom-

paniment

area

FILL A≥B

ENDING

NOTE

• This function can be used when ACMP is turned on.

• Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for

turning Tracks on or off.

Appears when the

synchro-stop func-

tion is engaged.

NOTE

On/off status is shown in

the display (page 19)

NOTE

Style and Pattern Settings

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Pattern Variations—Sections

Like the Styles, each Pattern features several Sec-

tions, allowing you to add dynamic variations to the

performance. Five Sections (A–E) are provided.

Unlike the Styles, however, Patterns do not have the

Sections dedicated to the beginning or ending of the

Song, such as Intro and Ending. All Sections A–E will

play back repeatedly until stopped manually.

Pattern Retrigger Function

This function restarts Pattern playback from the

beginning.

Press the [PATTERN] button, then rotate

the dial to select the desired Pattern.

Press the [START/STOP] button or press

any key in the Auto Accompaniment

area to start Pattern playback (page 27).

By pressing the button of the currently

playing Section, you can restart play-

back from the beginning. Holding down

the button lets loop-play only the top

portion of the Section.

The top portion length (Retrigger Rate) can be

changed by using the knob (page 47).

Changing the Tempo

A Style or Pattern can be played at any tempo you

desire—fast or slow.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up

the Tempo value in the display.

Rotate the dial to set a tempo from 011 to

280.

Pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simulta-

neously can instantly reset the value to the

default tempo of the current Style or Pattern. You

can change the tempo during playback by press-

ing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the

required tempo.

Tap Start

You can start play back of the Style, Pattern or Song

by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the

required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4

(4/4, etc.), and three times for time signatures in 3 (3/

4, etc.).

• When recording Pattern playback with the Retrigger function,

note that the beat indicator in the display, metronome and

Arpeggio playback is not synchronized with playback of the

recorded Song.

NOTE

• The above operation applies also to Song or Arpeggio

playback tempo.

• Tap tempo setting range: 32–280

Tempo

090

Current Tempo

NOTE

Style and Pattern Settings

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Adjusting the Volume of the Style

or Pattern

You can adjust the volume balance between Style or

Pattern playback and your keyboard performance.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “StyleVol” (Function 001) or

“PatrnVol” (Function 003).

Rotate the dial to set the volume

between 000 and 127.

Setting the Split Point

The point on the keyboard that separates the left-

hand area and the right-hand area of the keyboard is

called the “Split Point.” The left-hand area is used to

specify the chord for Style playback, to specify the

key for Pattern playback, or to play the Split Voice.

The default Split Point is key number 054 (the F#2

key), but you can change it to another key.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “SplitPnt” (Function 009).

You can call up this display also by pressing the

[STYLE] then holding the [ACMP] button for lon-

ger than a second.

Rotate the dial to set the Split Point

between 036 (C1) and 096 (C6) (on the

PSR-E453) or 028 (E0) and 103 (G6) (on

the PSR-EW400).

Playing Chords Without Style

Playback (Stop Accompaniment)

If you press the [STYLE] button, press the [ACMP

ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on (the ACMP ON

icon appears), and play the chord in the Auto Accom-

paniment area of the keyboard (with SYNC START

off), the chord sound will be heard without Style play-

back. This is referred to as “Stop Accompaniment.”

The specified chord will be shown in the display, and

affects the Harmony function (page 23).

StyleVol

100

001

Style (or Pattern)

volume

• During the Lesson playback, the Split Point cannot be

changed.

SplitPnt

054

009

Split Point

Split Voice,

chords (Style) or

keys (Pattern)

Main Voice (and Dual Voice)

Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2)

036

(C1)

048

(C2)

060

(C3)

072

(C4)

084

(C5)

096

(C6)

NOTE

Auto

Accompani-

ment area

Specified chord

Appears when auto

accompaniment is on

Style and Pattern Settings

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Chord Types for Style Playback

For users who are new to chords, this chart features common chords. Since there are many useful chords and

many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.

 indicates the root note.

• Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions:

m7, m7

5, m7(11), 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7

5, 6(9), sus2

• Inversion of the 7sus4 chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted.

• When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown

on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm and bass parts will be played.

Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh

Easy Chords

This method lets you easily play chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard using only one,

two, or three fingers.

For root “C”

To play a major chord

Press the root note ()

of the chord.

To play a minor chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

black key to the left of it.

To play a seventh chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

white key to the left of it.

To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together

with the nearest white and

black keys to the left of it (three

keys altogether).

Style and Pattern Settings

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Looking Up Chords Using the

Chord Dictionary

The Dictionary function is useful when you know the

name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn

how to play it.

Press and hold the [LESSON] button for

longer than a second to call up “Dict.”

This operation will divide the entire keyboard into

the three ranges as illustrated below.

• The range to the right of “ROOT”:

Lets you specify the chord root, but produces

no sound.

• The range between “CHORD TYPE” and

“ROOT”:

Lets you specify the chord type, but produces

no sound.

• The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE”:

Lets you play and confirm the chord specified

in the above two ranges.

As an example, learn how to play a GM7

(G major seventh) chord.

2-1.

Press the “G” key in the section to the right

of “ROOT” so that the “G” is shown as the

root note.

2-2.

Press the key labeled “M7” in the section

between “CHORD TYPE” and “ROOT.”

The notes you should play for the specified

chord (root note and chord type) are con-

veniently shown in the display, both as

notation and in the keyboard diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord, press

the [+/YES] or [-/NO] button.

Following the notation and keyboard

diagram in the display, try playing a

chord in the range to the left of “CHORD

TYPE.”

When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell

sound signals your success and the chord name

in the display flashes.

Dict.

Hold for longer than

a second.

The

highest

key

Chord Type range Root range

Keyboard

playing range

Dict.

001

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually

indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers

to C major. However, when specifying major chords

here, make sure to press the key of “M” (major) after

pressing the root note.

Specifying only the key for Pattern play-

back

Note that you need to specify only the root note for

Pattern playback, unlike Style playback for which

you also need to specify the chord type.

Dict.

001

Chord name (root and type)Notation of chord

Individual notes of chord

(keyboard)

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Song Settings

BGM (Background Music)

Playback

With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button

will play back only a few of the internal Songs repeat-

edly. This setting can be changed so that, for exam-

ple, all internal Songs are played, or all Songs

transferred to the instrument from a computer are

played back, letting you use the instrument as a

background music source. Five playback group set-

tings are provided. Simply select the one that suits

your needs.

Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer

than a second to call up “DemoGrp.”

After a few seconds, the current repeat playback

group appears.

Rotate the dial to select a repeat play-

back group from the table below.

Press the [DEMO] button to start play-

back.

To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again.

Random Song Playback

The order of Song repeat playback via the [DEMO]

button can be changed between the numerical order

and random order.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “PlayMode” (Function 066).

After a few seconds, the current playback mode

appears.

When the DemoGrp is set to “Demo,” this param-

eter cannot be set.

Rotate the dial to select “Random.”

To return to the numerical order, select “Normal.”

Press the [DEMO] button to start play-

back.

To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again.

Demo Preset Songs 001–003

Preset All preset Songs

User All User Songs

Download All Songs transferred from a computer

USB

All Songs (MIDI files) in the connected USB

flash drive

• When User Songs, Download Songs and USB Songs

data do not exist, Demo Songs are played back.

DemoGrp

065

Hold for longer than

a second.

NOTE

PlayMode

066

Song Settings

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Tempo Setting of the Song

This operation is same as that of the Style and Pat-

tern. Refer to page 52.

Tap Start

This operation is same as that of the Style and Pat-

tern. Refer to page 52.

Song Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “SongVol” (Function 002).

Rotate the dial to set the Song volume

between 000 and 127.

Melody Voice Setting of the

Preset Song

You can change the Melody Voice of the current Pre-

set Song temporarily to any other desired Voice.

Press the [SONG] button, select the

desired Preset Song, then start playback

(page 28).

Press the [VOICE] button, then rotate the

dial to select the desired Voice.

Hold down the [VOICE] button for longer

than a second to call up “SONG MEL-

ODY VOICE.”

After a few seconds, the Melody Voice of the

Song will be changed to that selected in step 2.

• Song volume can be adjusted while in the Song mode.

SongVol

002

100

Song volume

NOTE

• Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody

Voice.

• You cannot change the Melody Voice of a User Song.

Strings

070

SONG MEL

Hold for longer than

a second.

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

The Functions

The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as

Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. Find the desired item in the Function List on

pages 58–61, then follow the instructions below.

Basic Procedure in the Function

Display

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button

several times until the desired item

appears.

Use the dial, the [+/YES] and [-/NO] but-

tons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to

set the value of the selected function.

To restore the default value, press the [+/YES]

and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously. In the sole

case of the MIDI Initial Send function (Function

057), pressing the [+/YES] button executes the

function while pressing [-/NO] cancels it.

Some Function settings are maintained even if

you turn off the power, and can be transferred to a

computer as Backup Data (page 39).

Function List

SplitPnt

054

009

Current item

Current Function

number

• To exit from a Function display, press the [VOICE],

[STYLE], [SONG] or [PATTERN] button.

Direct

numeric entry

Press simultane-

ously to recall the

default setting.

•Increment

value by 1

•Execute

• Decrement

value by 1

•Cancel

NOTE

Function Number

Function Display Range/Settings

Default

Value

Description

PSR-

E453

PSR-

EW400

Volume

001 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 53.

002 002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 57.

003 003 Pattern Volume PatrnVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 53.

004 004

[AUX IN] Audio

Volume

AuxInVol 000–127 50

Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [AUX IN]

jack (page 36).

005 005

[USB TO HOST]

Audio Volume

USBInVol 000–127 100

Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [USB TO

HOST] terminal (page 36, 37).

Overall

006 006 Transpose Transpos -12–12 00 Refer to page 41.

007 007 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 440.0Hz Refer to page 41.

008 008 Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 02

Sets the range over which you can control pitch by using the

[PITCH BEND] wheel (page 41), in semitone increments.

009 009 Split Point SplitPnt

036–096

(C1–C6; PSR-E453)/

028–103

(E0–G6; PSR-EW400)

054 (F#2) Refer to page 53.

010 010 Touch Response TouchRes

1 (Soft), 2 (Medium),

3 (Hard), 4 (Fixed)

2 (Medium) Refer to page 42.

The Functions

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Main Voice (page 20)

011 011 Volume M.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Main Voice.

012 012 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.

013 013 Pan M.Pan

000 (left)–

064 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the stereo pan position of the Main Voice. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value

“127” results in the sound being panned full right.

014 014 Reverb Depth M.Reverb 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Main Voice's signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

015 015 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

016 016 Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 064

Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice reaches

the Attack level when the note is pressed. The larger the

value, the slower the attack rate. The smaller the value, the

faster the attack rate.

017 017 Release Time M.Releas 000–127 064

Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice falls to 0

when the note is released. The larger the value, the longer

the sustain. The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain.

018 018

Filter Cutoff

M.Cutoff 000–127 064

Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (page 46) of the Main

Voice.

019 019

Filter Resonance

M.Reso. 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Resonance (

page 46

) of the Main Voice.

Dual Voice (page 21)

020 020 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–758 * Selects a Dual Voice.

021 021 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.

022 022 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.

023 023 Pan D.Pan

000 (left)–

064 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the stereo pan position of the Dual Voice. A value

of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of

“127” results in the sound being panned full right.

024 024 Reverb Depth D.Reverb 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

025 025 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

026 026 Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 064

Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice reaches

the Attack level when the note is pressed. The larger the

value, the slower the attack rate. The smaller the value, the

faster the attack rate.

027 027 Release Time D.Releas 000–127 064

Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice falls to 0

when the note is released. The larger the value, the longer

the sustain. The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain.

028 028

Filter Cutoff

D.Cutoff 000–127 064

Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (

page 46

) of the Dual

Voice.

029 029

Filter Resonance

D.Reso. 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Resonance (

page 46

) of the Dual Voice.

Split Voice (page 21)

030 030 Split Voice S.Voice 001–758

054

(FngrBass)

Selects a Split Voice.

031 031 Volume S.Volume 000–127 080 Determines the volume of the Split Voice.

032 032 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 -1 Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.

033 033 Pan S.Pan

000 (left)–

064 (center)–

127 (right)

064

Determines the stereo pan position of the Split Voice. A value

of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of

“127” results in the sound being panned full right.

034 034 Reverb Depth S.Reverb 000–127 008

Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

035 035 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 000

Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Effects

036 036 Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 ** Refer to page 40.

037 037 Chorus Type Chorus 1–6 ** Refer to page 40.

038 038 Master EQ Type MasterEQ

1 (Speaker),

2 (Headphone),

3 (Boost), 4 (Piano),

5 (Bright), 6 (Mild)

1 (Speaker) Refer to page 42.

039 039 Melody Suppressor SupprPan

L63, L62...L02, L01, C,

R01, R02...R62, R63

Determines the pan position to be cancelled when the Melody

Suppressor (page 37) is turned on.

Function Number

Function Display Range/Settings

Default

Value

Description

PSR-

E453

PSR-

EW400

The Functions

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

DSP (page 48)

040 040 DSP Type DSP Type 01–10 01

Refer to page 48.

041 041 DSP Part DSP Part

1 (Keyboard)

2 (Style)

1 (Keyboard)

Harmony (page 23)

042 042 Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 * Determines the Harmony type.

043 043 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

Arpeggio (page 24)

044 044 Arpeggio Type ARP Type 001–150 * Determines the Arpeggio type.

045 045 Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo 1 (Original), 2 (Thru)

Depending

on the

Arpeggio

type

When “Thru” is selected, the velocities of Arpeggio playback

are determined by your playing strength. When “Original” is

selected, the velocities of Arpeggio playback are determined

by the original setting regardless of your playing strength.

046 046 Arpeggio Quantize Quantize

1 (OFF), 2 (1/8),

3 (1/16)

Depending

on the

Arpeggio

type

Refer to page 49.

047 047 Pedal Function Pdl Func

1 (Sustain) /

2 (Arp Hold) /

3 (Hold+Sus)

* Refer to page 49.

Scale Tuning (page 43)

048 048 Scale Scale

1 (Equal),

2 (Pure Maj),

3 (Pure min),

4 (Bayat), 5 (Rast)

1 (Equal) Refer to page 43.

049 049 Base Note BaseNote

01 (C), 02 (C#), 03 (D),

04 (Eb), 05 (E), 06 (F),

07 (F

), 08 (G), 09 (A

10 (A), 11 (Bb), 12(B)

01 (C) Refer to page 43.

050 050 Tuning Note TuneNote

01 (C), 02 (C#), 03 (D),

04 (Eb), 05 (E), 06 (F),

07 (F

), 08 (G), 09 (A

10 (A), 11 (Bb), 12(B)

01 (C)

Refer to page 44.

051 051 Tuning Tune -64–63

Depending

on the Scale

MIDI

052 052 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the

internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record

your keyboard performance to application software on a com-

puter via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF.

053 053 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the inter-

nal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record

your keyboard performance to application software on a com-

puter via MIDI, set this parameter to ON.

054 054 Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF ON

Determines whether MIDI messages generated via keyboard

performance are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB

TO HOST] terminal.

055 055 Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Style

playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB TO

HOST] terminal.

056 056 Song Out SongOut ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Song

playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB TO

HOST] terminal.

057 057 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO -

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer.

Press

[+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation

should be done immediately after starting the Recording

operation on a computer.

Audio (page 36)

058 058 Audio Loop Back LoopBack ON/OFF ON

Determines whether Audio sound input from the [USB TO

HOST] terminal is returned to the computer or not with the

performance played on the instrument. If you want to output

only the sound played on this instrument to the computer, set

this parameter to OFF.

Function Number

Function Display Range/Settings

Default

Value

Description

PSR-

E453

PSR-

EW400

The Functions

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

* The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice.

** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Pattern.

Metronome (page 22)

059 059

Time Signature

Numerator

TimesigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

060 060

Time Signature

Denominator

TimesigD

Half note, Quarter

note, Eighth note,

Sixteenth note

** Determines the length of each metronome beat.

061 061 Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Lesson (page 30)

062 062 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16, OFF 01

Determines the guide track number for your right hand les-

son. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0, in

USB flash drive or transferred from a computer.

063 063 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16, OFF 02

Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0, in

USB flash drive or transferred from a computer.

064 064 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON

This parameter is for Lesson 3 (WAITING). When set to ON,

playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you

are playing. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be main-

tained regardless of the speed at which you are playing.

Demo (page 28)

065 065 Demo Group DemoGrp

1 (Demo) / 2 (Preset) /

3 (User) / 4 (Down-

load) / 5 (USB)

1 (Demo) Refer to page 56.

066 066 Demo Play Mode PlayMode

1 (Normal)

2 (Random)

1 (Normal) Refer to page 56.

Speaker Mute (page 38)

– 067 Speaker Mute SP Mute ON/OFF OFF Refer to page 38.

Auto Power Off (page 16)

067 068 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff

OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/

120 (min.)

30 minutes

Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s

power is automatically turned off.

Battery (page 14)

068 069 Battery Type

Battery

Type

1 (Alkaline) / 2 (Ni-MH) 1 (Alkaline)

Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instru-

ment.

Language (page 63)

069 070 Language Language English/Japanese English

Determines the language for the Song file names. Deter-

mines the language for the name of the files in the USB flash

drive or the files loaded from a computer.

• The settings of “MIDI” and “Audio” is useful when an external device such as a computer is connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal

(page 36).

Function Number

Function Display Range/Settings

Default

Value

Description

PSR-

E453

PSR-

EW400

NOTE

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

USB Flash Drive Operations

By connecting the USB flash drive (sold separately) to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal,

you can save the data created on this instrument, such as User Song and parameter

settings. The saved data can be recalled to this instrument again for the future use.

• You should use an AC adaptor when executing USB flash drive operations, since battery power may not be reliable

enough to last through these crucial operations. When you try executing certain functions, the “UseAdpt” indication

may appear and the selected function cannot be executed.

IMPORTANT

Precautions when using the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal

This instrument features a built-in [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device

to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device

with care. Follow the important precautions below.

 Compatible USB devices

• USB flash drive

Other USB devices such as a USB hub, computer

keyboard or mouse cannot be used.

The instrument does not necessarily support all

commercially available USB devices. Yamaha can-

not guarantee operation of USB devices that you

purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use

with this instrument, please visit the following web

page:

http://download.yamaha.com/

Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on

this instrument, the amount of time for saving to or

loading from the USB device may differ depending

on the type of data or the status of the instrument.

 Connecting a USB device

• When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector

on the device is appropriate and that it is con-

nected in the proper direction.

Using a USB Flash Drive

By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive,

you can save data you’ve created to the connected

device, as well as read data from the connected

device.

 Number of USB flash drives that can be

used

Only one USB flash drive can be connected to the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

 Formatting a USB flash drive

You should format the USB flash drive only with this

instrument (page 64). A USB flash drive formatted

on another device may not operate properly.

 To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently

erased, apply the write-protect provided with each

USB flash drive. If you are saving data to the USB

flash drive, make sure to disable write-protect.

 Turning off the instrument

When turning off the instrument, make sure that the

instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by

playback/recording or file management (such as

during Save, Delete and Format operations). Failure

to do so may corrupt the USB flash drive and the

data.

• For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer

to the owner’s manual of the USB device.

• The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of

5V/500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above

this, since this can cause damage to the instrument itself.

NOTE

• Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device while

executing playback/recording and file management opera-

tions (such as Save, Delete and Format), or when accessing

the USB device. Failure to observe this may result in “freez-

ing” of the operation of the instrument or corruption of the

USB device and the data.

• When connecting then disconnecting the USB device (and

vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the

two operations.

• When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is

less than 3 meters. Do not connect an extension cable.

• The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting

does not contain important data.

NOTICE

NOTE

NOTICE

USB Flash Drive Operations

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Connecting a USB Flash Drive

Connect a USB flash drive to the [USB

TO DEVICE] terminal, and wait until

“USB” appears on the left corner of the

display.

The “USB” indication confirms that the connected

USB flash drive has been mounted or recognized.

Hold down the [FUNCTION] button for

longer than a second to call up the File

Control display.



If “UnFormat” followed by “Format?”

appears:

This indicates that the connected USB flash

drive requires formatting. Execute the Format

operation by following the instructions starting

with step 2 on page 64.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up the desired File Control function,

then execute it.

For details, refer to the table on the right.

File Control Display List

• Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Precautions

when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 62.

• Messages may appear on the display during File Control pro-

cedures to aid in smooth operation. Refer to the Message List

on page 69 for details.

The File Control display cannot be called up in the follow-

ing situations.

• During playback of Style, Pattern, or Song

• When “USB” does not appear even if you have con-

nected a USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] ter-

minal.

• No sound will be produced if the keyboard is played

while the File Control display is showing, and only but-

tons related to File Control operations will be active.

NOTE

Mounting (flashes) Mounted (lights)

Load STY

Hold for longer

than a second.

NOTE

Display File Control function Page

Load STY Loading a Style File 67

Load USR

Loading User Data from a

USB Flash Drive

Save SMF

Saving a User Song as SMF

to a USB Flash Drive

Save USR

Saving User Data to a USB

Flash Drive

Del SMF

Deleting a SMF File in a USB

Flash Drive

Del USR

Deleting a User File in a USB

Flash Drive

Format? Formatting a USB Flash Drive 64

Exit?

Exiting from a File Control

Display

• You can also exit from a File Control display only by

pressing the [FUNCTION] button.

Recognizable file location in the USB flash

drive for Song playback (page 28)

Song title display language

File names containing Japanese katakana characters

will be properly displayed if the instrument’s display lan-

guage is set to “Japanese.” All display information other

than file names will be displayed in English even if “Jap-

anese” is selected. For details, refer to page 61 Func-

tion 069 (PSR-E453)/Function 070 (PSR-EW400).

NOTE

• If you manage the Song files in the USB flash drive by

using a computer, etc., make sure to store the data

either in the USB flash drive's root directory or a first-

level/second-level folder in the root directory. Data

stored in third-level-folders created inside a second-

level folder cannot be selected and played by this

instrument.

IMPORTANT

Can be selected/

played.

Cannot be selected/

played.

USB flash drive (Root)

Song

File

Song

File

Song

File

Song

File

USB Flash Drive Operations

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Formatting a USB Flash Drive

The Format operation lets you prepare commercially

available USB flash drive for use with this instrument.

Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer

than a second to call up the File Control

display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Format?.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel

the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Format

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears, and the “USER FILES”

folder will be created in the USB flash drive.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit

from the File Control display.

Saving User Data to a USB Flash

Drive

The following data created on this instrument com-

prise the “User Data.”

• All 10 User Songs (page 32)

• Styles which have been transferred from a com-

puter then loaded to Style numbers 221–230

(page 67).

• All the Registration Memory settings (page 35)

The User Data can be saved as a single “User File”

(.usr) to a USB flash drive.

Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer

than a second to call up the File Control

display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Save USR.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

As the target file name, “USER***” (***: number)

appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial

to select a different file name from “USER001”–

“USER100.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel

the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

• The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting

does not contain important data.

• The Format operation cannot be cancelled during

execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may

result in data loss.

NOTICE

Format?

NOTICE

• The extension (.usr) of the User File will not be shown on the

display of this instrument. Confirm the extension on the com-

puter display when connecting the USB flash drive to a com-

puter.

Overwriting existing files

If a file that already contains data is selected as the

target user file, an overwrite confirmation message

will appear.

NOTE

Save USR

USER001

USB Flash Drive Operations

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Save

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears, and a User file (.usr) will

be saved in a “USER FILES” folder which will

automatically be created on the USB flash drive.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit

from the File Control display.

Saving a User Song as SMF to a

USB Flash Drive

A User Song can be converted to SMF (Standard

MIDI File) format 0 and saved to a USB flash drive.

Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer

than a second to call up the File Control

display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Save SMF.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

As the target User Song, “USER**” (**: number

1–10) appears on the display. If desired, rotate

the dial to select a different User Song from

“USER01”–“USER10” then press the [0/EXE-

CUTE] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

As the target file name on the USB flash drive,

“SONG***” (***: number 1–100) appears on the

display. If desired, rotate the dial to select the dif-

ferent file.

• The Save operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may

result in data loss.

• The amount of time required for this operation may vary

depending on the condition of the USB flash drive.

• If you want to recall the User file (.usr) to this instrument

again, execute the Load operation (page 66).

NOTICE

NOTE

SMF (Standard MIDI File) format

With this format, various events via the keyboard per-

formance such as note on/off and Voice selection will

be recorded as MIDI data. The SMF Format 0 and For-

mat 1 are available. A large number of MIDI devices are

compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially

available Song files (MIDI files) are provided in SMF

Format 0.

• Patterns recorded to a User Song cannot be converted to

SMF.

• The DSP effect (page 48) cannot be converted to SMF format.

NOTE

Save SMF

User 1

SONG001

USB Flash Drive Operations

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel

the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Save

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears, and a User Song will be

saved as the SMF format 0 in a “USER FILES”

folder which will automatically be created on the

USB flash drive.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit

from the File Control display.

Loading User Data from a USB

Flash Drive

A User data (page 64) saved as a User file (.usr) to

the USB flash drive can be loaded to this instrument.

Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer

than a second to call up the File Control

display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Load USR.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

“USER***” (***: number) appears on the display

as the User file name in the USB flash drive. As

desired, rotate the dial to select a different User

file.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel

the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Load

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Overwriting existing files

If a file that already contains data is selected, an

overwrite confirmation message will appear.

• The Save operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may

result in data loss.

• The amount of time required for this operation may vary

depending on the condition of the USB flash drive.

• If a Pattern has been recorded to the User Song, the

Save operation cannot be executed by pressing the [0/

EXECUTE] button or the [+/YES] button, and “Can’tUse”

appears on the display.

NOTICE

NOTE

• Loading a User file will overwrite and erase the existing

data, including all 10 User Songs, Style data loaded to the

Style numbers 221–230, and all the Registration Memory

settings. Save important data you want to keep to a sepa-

rate USB flash drive before loading a User file.

• Note that User files should be saved in the “USER FILES”

folder on the USB flash drive. Files saved outside this

folder cannot be recognized.

• The Load operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may

result in data loss.

NOTICE

IMPORTANT

Load USR

USER001

NOTICE

USB Flash Drive Operations

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit

from the File Control display.

Check the loaded data by calling up the

User Song, one of the Styles 221–230,

and Registration Memory settings.

Loading a Style File

Style data created on another instrument or a com-

puter can be loaded to the Style numbers 221–230,

and you can play them like the internal preset Styles.

The following two Load operations are available.

• Loading of a Style file (.sty) saved on the root direc-

tory on the USB flash drive

• Loading of a Style file (.sty) transferred from a com-

puter via the Musicsoft Downloader and stored in

the internal memory of this instrument

Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer

than a second to call up the File Control

display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Load STY.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

The name of a Style file in the USB flash drive or

internal memory of this instrument will appear on

the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a

different Style file.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

As the Load destination, “Load To? ***” (***: 221–

230) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the

dial to select a different number.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel

the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Load

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Press the [STYLE] button, rotate the dial

to select a Style from 221–230, and then

try playing it back.

• For instructions on transferring a Style file from a computer via

the Musicsoft Downloader, refer to the online PDF manual

(page 11) “Computer-related Operations.” After data transfer,

load the Style data to one of the Style numbers 221–230 to

enable playback.

• Loading a Style file will overwrite and erase the existing

data of the destination number. Save important data you

want to keep to a separate USB flash drive before loading.

NOTE

NOTICE

Load STY

DiscoFox

USb

• The Load operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may

result in data loss.

Load To?

221

NOTICE

USB Flash Drive Operations

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Deleting a User File in the USB

Flash Drive

User Files (.usr) in the root directory of the USB flash

drive can be deleted.

Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer

than a second to call up the File Control

display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Del USR.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

User file names in the USB flash drive appear on

the display as “USER****” (****: number). If

desired, rotate the dial to select a different User

file.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel

the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit

from the File Control display.

Deleting an SMF File in the USB

Flash Drive

You can delete a SMF file that has been saved in the

USB flash drive via the Save SMF operation (page

65).

Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer

than a second to call up the File Control

display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Del SMF.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

SMF file names in the USB flash drive appear on

the display as “SONG****” (****: number).

If desired, rotate the dial to select a different SMF

file.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel

the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit

from the File Control display.

• Only User files (.usr) saved in the “USER FILES” folder on

the USB flash drive can be deleted. Files outside this folder

cannot be recognized.

• The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may

result in data loss.

IMPORTANT

Del USR

USER001

NOTICE

• Only SMF files (.mid) saved in the “USER FILES” folder on

the USB flash drive can be deleted. Files outside this folder

cannot be recognized. This operation applies only to file

names with the “SONG***” (***: 001–100) format.

• The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may

result in data loss.

IMPORTANT

Del SMF

SONG001

NOTICE

USB Flash Drive Operations

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Exiting from a File Control

Display

To exit from the File Control display, press the

[FUNCTION], [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG] or [PAT-

TERN] button.

You can also exit from the File Control function mode

as follows:

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Exit?.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button to exit

from the File Control display.

Message List

Exit?

Message Comment

Can’tUse

• Indicates that the file control function is

currently unavailable since the USB flash

drive is being accessed.

• Displayed when attempting to save a User

Song recorded Pattern as SMF format 0.

Complet.

Indicates the specified job completion such

as data saving and transmission.

Data Err

Displayed when the user song contains ille-

gal data.

Disk Ful

Displayed when saving data cannot be exe-

cuted since the memory becomes full.

Delete any unnecessary data or use another

USB flash drive.

Error

Displayed when a file error or operational

error occurs.

File Ful

Displayed when saving data cannot be exe-

cuted since the total number of files exceeds

the capacity.

Delete the unnecessary data or use another

USB flash drive.

no data There is no data in the memory.

no file There is no file in the memory.

Ovr

(Flashes)

Communication with the USB flash drive has

been shut down because of overcurrent to

the USB flash drive. Disconnect the USB

flash drive from the [USB TO DEVICE] ter-

minal, then turn on the power of the instru-

ment.

Protect

Displayed when trying to save or delete data

on a protected USB flash drive, or formatting

a protected USB flash drive. Set protect to

off and try again.

UnFormat

Displayed when connecting an unformatted

USB flash drive.

UseAdpt

USB flash drive save, delete, and format

operations cannot be performed when the

instrument is being powered from battery.

Use an AC adaptor.

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Refer to the “Message List” on page 69 as required.

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical

power.

When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off

suddenly and unexpectedly.

This is normal. If an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used,

power may be turned off suddenly and unexpectedly.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may pro-

duce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it

further away from the instrument

The instrument is automatically turned off even if no

operation is done.

This is normal. This occurs due to the Auto Power Off function (page

16).

• The volume is too soft.

• The sound quality is poor.

• The Style/Pattern/Song/Arpeggio stops unexpectedly

or will not play.

• The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-

rectly.

• The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel

settings are reset.

• The instrument turns off when a USB flash drive is

connected.

The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely

new ones or completely recharged ones, or use the AC adaptor.

No sound is produced even when the keyboard is

played, or a Song, Style, or Pattern is being played

back.

Check whether a set of headphones or an audio cable is connected to

the [PHONES/OUTPUT], or not. When such a connection is made, no

sound is output from the speaker of this instrument.

(PSR-EW400) Check the on/off status of the Speaker Mute setting

(page 38). Make sure to set to OFF.

Check the on/off status of the Local Control (page 61). Normally, set

this parameter to ON.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the

opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch

cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the foot-

switch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning

on the power.

No sound is produced even when playing keys in the

right hand area of the keyboard, although chords

played in the left hand area are recognized.

Check whether or not the Dictionary function (page 55) is used. When

used, this is normal.

Not all of the Voices seem to sound, or the sound

seems to be cut off, when playing the keyboard,

Arpeggio, Style or Pattern or Song.

You have exceeded 48 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum

polyphony (the maximum amount of notes that can be played simulta-

neously) of this instrument. If the Main, Dual, and Split Voices are

being used along with playback of Arpeggio, Style, Pattern or Song,

some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”).

The sound of the Voice changes from note to note.

This is normal. The tone generation method uses multiple recordings

(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the

actual sound of the Voice may be slightly different from note to note.

The keyboard performance and playback of Style/Pat-

tern/Song produces an unexpected or inappropriate

sound, and cannot be restored to the normal status.

Using the Knobs can produce dramatic changes in the sound, but may

also produce unexpected or undesired sounds. If you want to restore the

original, normal sound before being changed by the Knobs, press the

[DSP] button to turn DSP off, change the Voice, Style, Pattern or Song,

or press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button to reset the panel settings.

The Style, Pattern or Song does not start even when

the [START/STOP] button is pressed. The Arpeggio

does not start even when the note is pressed with the

Arpeggio turned on.

Check the on/off status of the External Clock (page 61). Normally, set

this parameter to OFF.

The volume of the Style, Pattern or Song is too low. Check the volume setting in the Functions (pages 53 and 57).

The chords played in the left hand area cannot be rec-

ognized even when ACMP is turned on.

Check the Split Point setting (page 53). Set this to an appropriate

value.

Style parts other than the Rhythm part produce no

sound.

Check the on/off status of the ACMP (page 26). Make sure to turn

ACMP on.

The ACMP indicator does not appear on the display

when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Check the on/off status of the [STYLE] lamp. When using a Style,

press the [STYLE] button to turn on the [STYLE] lamp.

Appendix

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Specifications

PSR-E453 PSR-EW400

Product Name Digital Keyboard

Size/Weight

Dimensions (W x D x H)

946 mm x 405 mm x 140 mm

(37-1/4” x 15-15/16” x 5-1/2”)

1178 mm x 412 mm x 138 mm

(46-3/8” x 16-1/4” x 5-7/16”)

Weight

6.6 kg (14 lbs 9 oz.)

(not including batteries)

8.4 kg (18 lbs 8 oz.)

(not including batteries)

Control Interface

Keyboard

Number of Keys 61 76

Touch Response Soft, Medium, Hard, Fixed

Other

Controllers

Pitch Bend

Wheel

Ye s

Knobs Yes

Display

Type LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

Language English

Panel Language English

Voices

Tone

Generation

Tone Generation

Technology

AWM Stereo Sampling

Polyphony 48

Preset

Number of

Voices

237 panel Voices + 24 Drum/SFX kits +

40 Arpeggio + 457 XGlite Voices

Live! Grand Piano +

236 panel Voices + 24 Drum/SFX kits +

40 Arpeggio + 457 XGlite Voices

Compatibility GM, XGlite

Effects

Types

Reverb 9 types

Chorus 5 types

Master EQ 6 types

Harmony 26 types

DSP 10 types

Functions

Dual Yes

Split Yes

Arpeggio 150 types

Melody

Suppressor

Ye s

Accompaniment

Styles

Preset

Number of

Styles

220

Fingering Multi finger

Style Control

ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, SYNC STOP, START/STOP,

INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL, TRACK ON/OFF

External Styles 10

Other Features

Music Database 378

One Touch

Setting (OTS)

Ye s

Compatibility Style File Format (SFF)

Patterns Preset

Number of

Patterns

Number of

Sections

Songs (MIDI)

Preset

Number of

Preset Songs

Recording

Number of

Songs

Number of

Tra ck s

6 (5 Melody + 1 Style/Pattern)

Data Capacity Approx. 19,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded)

Format

Playback SMF (Formats 0 & 1)

Recording Original File Format (SMF 0 conversion function)

Functions

Lesson/Guide Lesson 1 – 3 (Listening, Timing, Waiting), Repeat & Learn, Chord Dictionary

USB Audio (USB TO HOST) 44.1 kHz, 16 bit, stereo

Registration

Memory

Number of

Buttons

4 (x 8 banks)

erall Controls

Metronome Yes

Tempo Range 11 – 280

Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12

Tuning 427.0 – 440.0 – 453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments)

Scale Type 5 types

Miscellaneous PIANO Button Yes (Portable Grand Button)

Storage and

Connectivity

Storage

Internal Memory Approx. 1.29 MB

External Drives USB flash drive

Connectivity

USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE,

DC IN 12V, Headphones/Output,

Sustain Pedal, AUX IN (Stereo-mini)

USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE,

DC IN 16V, Headphones,

Sustain Pedal, AUX IN (Stereo-mini),

OUTPUT (L/L+R, R)

Amplifiers/

Speakers

Amplifiers

6 W + 6 W

(When using PA-150 AC adaptor)

12 W + 12 W

(When using PA-300C AC adaptor)

Speakers 12 cm x 2

Specifications

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then

download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your

Yamaha dealer.

Power Supply

Adaptor

PA-150 or

an equivalent recommended by Yamaha

PA-300C or

an equivalent recommended by Yamaha

Batteries

Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6),

manganese (R6) or

Ni-MH rechargeable batteries

Six “D” size alkaline (LR20),

manganese (R20) or

Ni-MH rechargeable batteries

Power Consumption

8 W

(When using PA-150 AC adaptor)

11 W

(When using PA-300C AC adaptor)

Auto Power Off Yes

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual

• Data List

• AC adaptor* (PA-150 or an equivalent

recommended by Yamaha)

* May not be included depending on your area.

Check with your Yamaha dealer.

•Music Rest

• Online Member Product Registration

• Owner’s Manual

• Data List

• AC adaptor* (PA-300C or an equivalent

recommended by Yamaha), power cord*

* May not be included depending on your area.

Check with your Yamaha dealer.

•Music Rest

• Online Member Product Registration

Separately Sold Accessories

(May not be available depending on your area.)

• AC adaptor: PA-150 or an equivalent

recommended by Yamaha

• Keyboard Stand: L-2C

• Headphones: HPH-150/HPH-100/

HPH-50

• Footswitch: FC4A/FC5

• Wireless MIDI adaptor: UD-BT01

• AC adaptor: PA-300C or an equivalent

recommended by Yamaha

• Keyboard Stand: L-6

• Headphones: HPH-150/HPH-100/

HPH-50

• Footswitch: FC4A/FC5

• Wireless MIDI adaptor: UD-BT01

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Index

A-B Repeat ................................29

AC Adaptor ................................14

Accessories ...............................10

ACMP ........................................26

Arpeggio ..............................24, 49

Arpeggio Quantize ....................49

Arpeggio Type ...........................24

Arpeggio Velocity ......................60

Attack ..................................46, 59

Audio Device .............................36

Audio Loop Back .......................60

Auto Accompaniment ................26

Auto Accompaniment area ........26

Auto Power Off ....................16, 61

AUX IN ......................................36

Backup ......................................39

Backup Clear .............................39

Base Note .................................43

Battery .......................................14

Battery Type ........................15, 61

BGM (Background Music) .........56

Chord Dictionary .......................55

Chord Type ................................54

Chorus ................................46, 59

Chorus Type ..............................40

Computer ..................................36

Computer-related Operations .... 11

Connection ................................36

Cutoff ...................................46, 59

Data List .................................... 11

Del SMF ....................................68

Del USR ....................................68

Demo Song ...............................28

Display ......................................19

DSP ..................................... 47, 48

DSP Part ...................................48

DSP Type ..................................48

Dual Voice ...........................21, 45

EG (Envelope Generator) ......... 46

Ending .......................................50

EQ (Equalizer) ..........................42

External Clock ........................... 60

Fast Forward .............................29

Fast Reverse ............................. 29

File Control Display ................... 63

Fill .............................................50

Filter ....................................46, 59

Fine Tuning ............................... 41

Flash Clear ............................... 39

Footswitch ............................17, 49

Formatting .................................64

Function ....................................58

Harmony ................................... 23

Harmony Type ........................... 60

Headphones ............................. 16

Initial Send ................................ 60

Initialization ............................... 39

Intro ...........................................50

iPhone/iPad ...............................37

iPhone/iPad Connection Manual

.............................................. 11

Keyboard Out ............................ 60

Keyboard Stand ........................ 17

Knob ...................................25, 46

Language ..................................61

Lesson ................................ 30, 61

Load STY ..................................67

Load USR .................................65

Local Control ............................. 60

Main ..........................................50

Main Voice ................................20

Master Volume .......................... 16

Melody Suppressor ..............37, 59

Melody Voice ............................57

Message List ............................ 69

Metronome ............................... 22

MIDI .......................................... 60

MIDI Basics ...............................11

MIDI Reference ..........................11

Music Database ........................ 26

Music Rest ................................ 10

Octave ...................................... 59

One Touch Setting (OTS) ......... 41

Output ....................................... 38

Pan ........................................... 59

Pattern .................................27, 50

Pattern Retrigger .................47, 52

Pause ....................................... 29

Pedal ................................... 17, 49

Pitch ......................................... 41

Pitch Bend Range .................... 58

Power ........................................ 16

Random .................................... 56

Recording ................................. 32

Registration Memory ................ 35

Release .............................. 46, 59

Repeat ................................ 29, 31

Resonance ......................... 46, 59

Retrigger Rate .......................... 47

Reverb ................................ 46, 59

Reverb Type .............................. 40

Save SMF ................................. 65

Save USR ................................. 64

Scale ........................................ 43

Section ............................... 50, 52

Song ................................... 28, 56

Song Book .................................11

Song Out .................................. 60

Speaker .............................. 16, 38

Specifications ........................... 71

Split Point ................................. 53

Split Voice ........................... 21, 45

Stop Accompaniment ............... 53

Style ................................... 26, 50

Style Out ................................... 60

Sustain ..................................... 17

Synchro Stop ............................ 51

Index

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Tap Start ..............................52, 57

Tempo ...........................22, 52, 57

Time Signature ..........................22

Touch Response .......................42

Track ..............................29, 32, 51

Transpose ..................................41

Troubleshooting .........................70

Tuning ........................................44

USB Flash Drive ........................62

USB TO DEVICE ......................62

USB TO HOST ..........................36

Voice ...................................20, 45

Volume ......................................16

Volume (AUX IN) .......................58

Volume (Harmony) ....................60

Volume (Metronome) .................22

Volume (Pattern) .......................53

Volume (Song) ..........................57

Volume (Style) ...........................53

Volume (USB TO HOST) ...........58

Volume (Voice) ..........................59

Volume Balance ........................46

Your Tempo ...............................61

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

MEMO

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should

not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with

your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human

health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service

or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the

correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical

involved.

(weee_battery_eu_en_01)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den

ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også

selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

Entsorgung leerer Batterien

(nur innerhalb Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien

oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei

einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben

werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

(battery)

PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual

LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON

PORTABLE KEYBOARDS

(NP, NPV, PSRE, PSREW, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES)

Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free

performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every

Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the

Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s

authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted

Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or

Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.

Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or

otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or

materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If

Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or

removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay

the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a)

damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to

follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the

carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been

altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)

deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)

damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/

noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of

alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original

Owner and is not transferable.

In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted

Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact

Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local

authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer

has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website

at www.Yamaha.com

. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of

the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase

document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found

ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon

receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.

Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE

APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER

EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.

YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT

YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION

MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to

state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to

assume for it any other express warranty.

If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:

CUSTOMER SERVICE

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373

Telephone: 800-854-1569

www.yamaha.com

Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1,

Canada

Tel: +1-416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: +1-714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.

Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José

Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México,

D.F., C.P. 03900

Tel: +52-55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B –

Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP,

Brazil

Tel: +55-11-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,

Sucursal Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,

Madero Este-C1107CEK,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: +54-11-4119-7000

VENEZUELA

Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A.

AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza,

Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela

Tel: +58-212-943-1877

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama,

P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, U.K.

Tel: +44-1908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-303-0

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen,

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: +41-44-3878080

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: +43-1-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/

ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: +43-1-60203900

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/

ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland

Tel: +48-22-880-08-88

BULGARIA

Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.

Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa

1528 Sofia, Bulgaria

Tel: +359-2-978-20-25

MALTA

Olimpus Music Ltd.

Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta

Tel: +356-2133-2093

NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/

LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: +31-347-358040

FRANCE

Yamaha Music Europe

7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest,

77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France

Tel: +33-1-6461-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy

Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: +39-02-93577-1

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal

en España

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231

Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain

Tel: +34-91-639-88-88

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki,

Greece

Tel: +30-210-6686260

SWEDEN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial

Scandinavia

JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: +46-31-89-34-00

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Denmark,

Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland

Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark

Tel: +45-44-92-49-00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Antaksentie 4

FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland

Tel: +358 (0)96185111

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -

Norwegian Branch

Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway

Tel: +47-6716-7800

ICELAND

Hljodfaerahusid Ehf.

Sidumula 20

IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: +354-525-5050

CROATIA

Euro Unit D.O.O.

Slakovec 73

40305 Nedelisce

Tel: +38540829400

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.

Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street,

Moscow, 121059, Russia

Tel: +7-495-626-5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-303-0

Yama h a M u sic G u l f F Z E

JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,

Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE

Tel: +971-4-801-1500

TURKEY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi

Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz

Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey

Tel: +90-212-999-8010

CYPRUS

Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd.

Nikis Ave 2k

1086 Nicosia

Tel: + 357-22-511080

Major Music Center

21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy

P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus

Tel: (392) 227 9213

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yama h a M u sic G u l f FZ E

JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,

Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE

Tel: +971-4-801-1500

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: +86-400-051-7700

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: +852-2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Private Limited

Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A,

Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002,

Haryana, India

Tel: +91-124-485-3300

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: +62-21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil,

Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea

Tel: +82-2-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.

No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: +60-3-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited

Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,

Singapore 530202, Singapore

Tel: +65-6740-9200

TAIWAN

Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd.

2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist.

New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: +886-2-7741-8888

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: +66-2215-2622

VIETNAM

Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited

15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach

Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,

Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam

Tel: +84-8-3818-1122

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

http://asia.yamaha.com

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

VIC 3006, Australia

Tel: +61-3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: +64-9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

http://asia.yamaha.com

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

DMI14

Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan

(For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrase 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

ZT18040

Manual Development Department

Published 03/2016 POAP-A0

Printed in China

Yamaha Global Site

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

Documenttranscriptie

Setting Up DIGITAL KEYBOARD Appendix Reference Quick Guide Owner’s Manual Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 5–7. EN For PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Serial No. Purchase Date ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. 2 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual (FCC DoC) For AC adaptor and PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 3 For AC adaptor This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (fcc_sengen_C) CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (can_b_01) Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) 4 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. For AC adaptor WARNING CAUTION • This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic instruments. Do not use for any other purpose. • Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments. • When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet, keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. For PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor Water warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 72) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. DMI-5 1/3 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 5 • Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally swallow them. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Battery • Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage. - Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. - Do not dispose of batteries in fire. - Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be charged. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - Use the specified battery type (page 72) only. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model, and made by the same manufacturer. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. - When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument. - When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. DMI-5 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Connections Location 6 • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. 2/3 • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Handling caution Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. DMI-5 3/3 NOTICE Information To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others' copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the product. * The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc. * You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases.  Handling • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.  Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.  Saving data • Some of the data of this instrument (page 39) are retained when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto USB flash drive/an external device such as a computer (pages 36, 64). Before using a USB flash drive, make sure to refer to page 62. • To protect against data loss through USB flash drive damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto spare USB flash drive or an external device such as a computer as backup data.  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs and the songs that can be downloaded from the Yamaha website have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 7 Table of Contents Setting Up Special Features ..............................................................8 Compatible Format and Functions .................................10 Included Accessories .....................................................10 About the Manuals .........................................................11 Setting Up Panel Controls and Terminals 12 Setting Up 14 Power Requirements......................................................14 Turning the Power On/Off ..............................................16 Adjusting the Master Volume .........................................16 Connecting Headphones or an External Device ............16 Using a Pedal (Sustain) .................................................17 Using a Keyboard Stand ................................................17 Quick Guide Quick Guide Basic Operation and Display Items 18 Basic Operation..............................................................18 Display Items..................................................................19 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 20 Selecting a Main Voice...................................................20 Playing the “Grand Piano” ..............................................20 Layering a Dual Voice ....................................................21 Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ....................21 Using the Metronome .....................................................22 Adding Harmony ............................................................23 Creating Arpeggios 24 Triggering Arpeggios ......................................................24 Changing the Arpeggio Type .........................................24 Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs 25 Assigning Functions to the Knobs ..................................25 Using the Knobs .............................................................25 Playing Styles 26 Using the Music Database .............................................26 Playing with Patterns Like a DJ! 27 Playing Songs 28 Listening to a Demo Song..............................................28 Selecting and Playing Back a Song ...............................28 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ..............29 Playing a Specified Section of a Song Repeatedly (A-B Repeat) ..............................................................29 Turning Each Track On/Off ............................................29 Using the Song Lesson Feature 30 Making Practice Perfect—Repeat & Learn ....................31 Recording Your Performance 32 Track Structure of a Song ..............................................32 Quick Recording ............................................................32 Recording to a Specified Track ......................................33 Clearing a User Song.....................................................34 Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song................34 Memorizing Your Favorite Settings (Registration Memory) 35 Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory...35 Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory ..35 Connecting to Other Devices 36 Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers....................................................................36 Connecting to a Computer .............................................36 Connecting to an iPhone/iPad .......................................37 Using the Melody Suppressor ........................................37 Using an External Stereo System for Playback (OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks) (PSR-EW400)...............38 Speaker Mute On/Off Setting (PSR-EW400) .................38 Backup and Initialization 39 Backup Parameters .......................................................39 Initializing the Instrument ...............................................39 Reference Special Features Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 20 Appendix The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. 8 Arpeggio Function Page 24 Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this function automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Play Audio via an External Device Page 36 By connecting an external audio device such as an iPhone/iPad or a device such as a computer, you can play the audio sound of that external device through this instrument. 40 Selecting a Reverb Type ................................................40 Selecting a Chorus Type ................................................40 Pitch Controls—Transpose ............................................41 Pitch Controls—Fine Tuning ..........................................41 Pitch Controls—the [PITCH BEND] wheel .....................41 Calling Up Optimum Panel Settings—One Touch Setting (OTS) .............................................................41 Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard ...........42 Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ..................42 Scale Tuning 43 Selecting a Scale ...........................................................43 Setting the Base Note for Each Scale ............................43 Tuning Each Note to Create an Original Scale ..............44 Voice Settings 45 Selecting a Dual Voice ...................................................45 Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................45 Voice Editing ..................................................................45 Parameters Assigned to the Knobs 46 Adding DSP Effects........................................................48 Arpeggio Settings 49 Synchronizing an Arpeggio to Song/Style/Pattern Playback—Arpeggio Quantize ...................................49 Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch ........49 Style and Pattern Settings 50 56 BGM (Background Music) Playback ..............................56 Random Song Playback ................................................56 Tempo Setting of the Song ............................................57 Tap Start ........................................................................57 Song Volume .................................................................57 Melody Voice Setting of the Preset Song ......................57 The Functions 58 Basic Procedure in the Function Display .......................58 USB Flash Drive Operations 62 Connecting a USB Flash Drive ......................................63 Formatting a USB Flash Drive .......................................64 Saving User Data to a USB Flash Drive ........................64 Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Drive .......65 Loading User Data from a USB Flash Drive ..................66 Loading a Style File .......................................................67 Deleting a User File in the USB Flash Drive ..................68 Deleting an SMF File in the USB Flash Drive ................68 Exiting from a File Control Display .................................69 Message List ..................................................................69 Appendix Troubleshooting ............................................................. 70 Specifications................................................................. 71 Index .............................................................................. 73 Reference Style Variations—Sections .............................................50 Style Synchro Stop.........................................................51 Turning Each Style Track On/Off ...................................51 Pattern Variations—Sections .........................................52 Pattern Retrigger Function .............................................52 Changing the Tempo......................................................52 Tap Start ........................................................................52 Song Settings Setting Up Handy Performance Features Adjusting the Volume of the Style or Pattern .................53 Setting the Split Point.....................................................53 Playing Chords Without Style Playback (Stop Accompaniment) ..............................................53 Chord Types for Style Playback.....................................54 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............55 Quick Guide Reference Page 26 The auto-accompaniment Styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering a wide variety of music genres. Select a Style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new Styles to expand your musical horizons. Create New Sounds Page 25 By simply adjusting two knobs you can enhance the sound of your performance with dynamic effect processing, such as adding distortion or applying luscious reverb. The functions that can be assigned to the knobs include filter, DSP effect, etc. Try playing like a DJ by using the Patterns! Page 27 The Pattern function lets you perform like a DJ. Use the Track Control to try out various instrument combinations, and play with the Knobs to create various new sounds. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Appendix Play Along with Styles 9 Compatible Format and Functions Setting Up GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). STYLE FILE FORMAT (SFF) The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. Included Accessories • Owner’s Manual (this book) • Data List • AC adaptor*1 • Power cord (PSR-EW400) • Music rest • Online Member Product Registration*2 *1:May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer. *2:The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Attaching the Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. 10 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual About the Manuals Setting Up This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials. NOTE • The illustrations and displays as shown in this manual are based on the PSR-E453. • Please note that the PSR-EW400 and PSR-E453 have different numbers of keys: the PSR-EW400 has 76 keys, and the PSR-E453 has 61 keys.  Included Documents Owner’s Manual (this book) • Setting Up Please read this section first. • Quick Guide This section explains how to use the basic functions. • Reference This section explains how to make detailed settings for the various functions of the instrument. • Appendix This section includes troubleshooting and specifications. Data List Contains various important preset content lists such as those of Voices, Styles, Patterns and Effects.  Online Materials (PDF) MIDI Reference Contains MIDI-related information for this instrument. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains basic explanations about MIDI. Computer-related Operations Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transmitting/receiving the data. iPhone/iPad Connection Manual Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc. To obtain these materials, access the Yamaha Downloads website, then enter the model name for searching the desired files. Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Downloading the Song Book/Song Data Song Book (only in English, French, German, Spanish and Japanese) Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument and the optional Songs. Song Data Contains the data of 70 Songs that can be played back with this instrument and/or used for the Song Lesson (page 30). After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download the Song Book and the Song Data free of charge. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/ You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this manual in order to fill out the User Registration form. NOTE • The downloaded Song data can be played back by transferring data from the computer to the instrument or saving data to the USB flash drive (page 28). PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 11 Panel Controls and Terminals Setting Up Front Panel The illustration is of the PSR-E453. Setting Up Dial (page 18) e r t y u i o !0 !4 !5 q w !1 !3 !6 !8 !7 !9 @0 @1 !2 Display (page 19) • Voice List (Data List) • Style List (Data List) • Song List (Data List) • Pattern List (Data List) @5 @4 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) @2 12 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 072 (C4) 084 (C5) As illustrated, each note of the keyboard has a specific note number and name (e.g., 036/C1), which is used in making various settings, such as Split Point (page 53). PSR-E453: 036 (C1) – 096 (C6) PSR-EW400: 028 (E0) – 103 (G6) 096 (C6) @3 Panel Controls and Terminals !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 [ ] (Standby/On) switch ....................Page 16 [MASTER VOLUME] control ................Page 16 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ...............Page 20 [DEMO] button......................................Page 28 [TRANSPOSE] button ..........................Page 41 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........Page 37 [LESSON] button..................................Page 30 [REC] button .........................................Page 32 [METRONOME] button.........................Page 22 [TEMPO/TAP] button............................Page 52 VOICE CONTROL section [SPLIT] button ...................................Page 21 [DUAL] button ...................................Page 21 [HARMONY] button ..........................Page 23 [ARPEGGIO] button..........................Page 24 LIVE CONTROL section [ASSIGN] button ...............................Page 25 [A] and [B] knobs .............................Page 25 [DSP] button......................................Page 48 CATEGORY buttons .............................Page 18 [FUNCTION] button ..............................Page 58 [MUSIC DATABASE] button .................Page 26 Number buttons [1]–[9], [-/NO], [0/EXECUTE] and [+/YES] buttons .....Page 18 REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [BANK/MEMORY] buttons................Page 35 [1]–[4] buttons...................................Page 35 [PATTERN] button ................................Page 27 [SONG] button ......................................Page 28 [STYLE] button .....................................Page 26 [VOICE] button .....................................Page 20 PATTERN/SONG/STYLE Control buttons •When the [PATTERN] lamp is on: ................................Pages 27 and 52 •When the [SONG] lamp is on: ..............................................Page 29 •When the [STYLE] lamp is on: .........................Pages 26, 50, and 51 @3 TRACK CONTROL buttons •When the [PATTERN] lamp is on: ..............................................Page 27 •When the [SONG] lamp is on: ......................................Pages 29, 32 Rear Panel PSR-E453 Setting Up q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1 PSR-EW400 @6 @7 #0 @8 @9 #1 @6 OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks (PSR-EW400) ..............................................Page 38 @7 [SUSTAIN] jack ..................................... Page 17 @8 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack (PSR-E453), [PHONES] jack (PSR-EW400) .............Page 16 @9 [AUX IN] jack ........................................Page 36 #0 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal .................Page 62 [USB TO HOST] terminal .....................Page 36 #1 DC IN jack ............................................. Page 14 •When the [STYLE] lamp is on: ..............................................Page 51 @4 [PITCH BEND] wheel ...........................Page 41 @5 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit ....Page 20 These indicate the drum or percussion instrument assigned to the corresponding keys (in the case of “Standard Kit 1,” shown in the Drum/SFX Kit List of the separate Data List). PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 13 Setting Up Power Requirements Plug Setting Up Although the instrument will run either from an AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. NOTICE Slide the plug as indicated. The shape of the plug differs depending on your area. CAUTION • You should use an AC adaptor when executing USB flash drive operations, since battery power may not be reliable enough to last through these crucial operations. Using an AC Adaptor • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn the power off and disconnect the plug from the outlet. NOTE • Follow this procedure in reverse order when disconnecting the AC adaptor. Connect the AC adaptor in the order shown in the illustration. PSR-E453 Using Batteries 1 This instrument requires the following batteries. • PSR-E453: Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. • PSR-EW400: Six “D” size alkaline (LR20), manganese (R20) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. DC IN jack (page 13) AC adaptor 2 The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH batteries are recommended for this instrument, since other types may result in poorer battery performance. AC outlet PSR-EW400 NOTICE 2 DC IN jack (page 13) • When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. 3 AC Outlet AC adaptor the instrument’s bottom panel. 1 PSR-E453 Power cord The shape of the plug differs depending on your area. WARNING • Use the specified AC adaptor (page 72) only. Using the wrong AC adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. WARNING • When using the AC adaptor with a removable plug, make sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor. Using the plug alone can cause electric shock or fire. • Never touch the metallic section when attaching the plug. To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and plug. 14 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off. 2 Open the battery compartment cover located on PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Setting Up PSR-EW400 NOTE Setting Up • This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. • Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the instrument.  Setting the battery type 3 Insert the six new batteries, putting them in the correct direction according to the illustration. PSR-E453 Depending on the battery type to be used, you may need to change the battery type setting on this instrument. To change the setting, first turn on the power to the instrument, then choose the battery type you would like to use. Alkaline (and manganese) batteries are chosen by default. For details, refer to page 61, Function 068 (PSR-E453)/Function 069 (PSREW400). NOTICE • Failure to set the battery type may shorten the amount of the battery life. Make sure to set the battery type correctly.  Checking the power status You can confirm the power source at the left corner of the display. Only one of these is shown. GrandPno PSR-EW400 : The power is supplied from the AC adaptor. : The power is supplied from the batteries. NOTE • When the AC adaptor is plugged in to the AC outlet, the battery icon does not appear even when batteries are inserted. In this case, the power is supplied from the AC adaptor. 4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTICE • Connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor with batteries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of data being recorded or transferred at the time. • Make sure to set the battery type correctly (page 15). • When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries with new ones or alreadyrecharged ones. Remaining battery power indication Indicates that the power will be turned off immediately. When rechargeable batteries are used, this icon flashes before the power is turned off. Indicates that remaining power is insufficient for operation. Before the power runs out, replace all the batteries with new ones, or fully recharged ones (when using rechargeable types). Note that the instrument may not work properly, including unusually soft volume and poor sound quality when remaining power becomes low. Indicates that the remaining power is sufficient. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 15 Setting Up Turning the Power On/Off Setting Up 1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] control to “MIN”. 1 2 NOTICE • When the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time while connected to an external device such as an amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to the instrument and the connected devices, in order to protect the devices from damage. If you do not want the power to turn off automatically when a device is connected, disable Auto Power Off. NOTE 2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. Adjust the volume as desired while playing the keyboard. 3 Press and hold the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for about a second to turn the power off. CAUTION • Even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the wall AC outlet. • Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the power is turned off. For details, see page 39. Adjusting the Master Volume To adjust the volume of the entire keyboard sound, use the [MASTER VOLUME] control while playing the keyboard. NOTICE • Press only the [ ] (Standby/On) switch when turning the power on. Any other operations such as pressing keys, buttons or the pedal are not allowed. Doing so may cause the instrument to malfunction. CAUTION • Do not use the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. Setting the Auto Power Off function To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off is 30 minutes by default; however, you can change the setting. For details, refer to page 61, Function 067 (PSR-E453)/Function 068 (PSREW400).  Disabling Auto Power Off (simple method) Turn the power on while holding down the lowest key on the keyboard. Then the instrument starts up with the Auto Power Off function disabled. Connecting Headphones or an External Device Standard stereo phone plug  Connecting Headphones PSR-E453 Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES/ OUTPUT]/[PHONES] jack on the rear panel. The built-in speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The lowest key  Connecting an External Device PSR-EW400 16 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual • PSR-E453: This jack also functions as an external output. By connecting to a computer, keyboard amplifier, recorder, or other audio device, you can Setting Up • PSR-EW400: When connecting an external speaker, refer to page 38. CAUTION • Do not use the headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum. Otherwise, damage to the components or electrical shock may occur. NOTICE • To avoid possible damage to the external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. When turning off the power, do so in reverse order: first turn off the power to the external device, then to the instrument. Using a Keyboard Stand The following keyboard stands (sold separately) can be used. • PSR-E453: L-2C • PSR-EW400: L-6 Setting Up output the audio signal of this instrument to that external device. The speakers of this instrument are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. When using L-6 Keyboard Stand (PSR-EW400) The exterior size of PSR-EW400 is beyond the limits as described in the L-6 Assembly Instructions. However, we have determined through tests that the stand can be safely used for the instrument. When setting the instrument, place it on the center of the stand as shown in the illustration. Make sure that the bottom of the instrument firmly rests on the stoppers. Using a Pedal (Sustain) Place the instrument so that the left and right parts of the stand are inside the protrusions on the bottom panel of the instrument. CAUTION You can produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch (FC5 or FC4A; sold separately) plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally slip down. This could cause physical injury to you or others, as well as damage to the instrument or other property. NOTE • Plug or unplug the footswitch while the power is off. Also, do not press the footswitch when turning the power on. Doing so changes the polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed operation. • The sustain function does not affect Split Voices (page 21). • Some Voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the footswitch is held. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 17 Basic Operation and Display Items Quick Guide Basic Operation This instrument features four basic functions: Voice, Style, Pattern and Song. To use this instrument, select a basic function first, and then make various settings. 3 2 Start a function or play the keyboard. Quick Guide Number buttons [0]–[9] Select a basic function. Dial Use these buttons to directly enter the desired Style/Voice number etc, or a parameter value. Example: Selecting Voice 003, Bright Piano. 1 Select an item or value. Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Decrease Increase Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. [+/YES], [-/NO] buttons Press the [+/YES] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-/NO] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Press Pressing both buttons simultane- briefly to ously lets you reset a parameter decrease. to the default value. CATEGORY [+], [-] buttons Press briefly to increase. When selecting a Voice, Style, Pattern, Song, etc., you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. These buttons can also be used to select function items sequentially after pressing the [FUNCTION] button. Jumps to the first item in the previous category. Jumps to the first item in the next category. Depending on the basic function selected in step 1, you can use the different functions as printed on the panel. Song functions are printed above the buttons, Pattern functions are printed further above, and Style functions are printed below. The “Press & Hold” Symbol Buttons having this indication can be used to call up an alternate function when the relevant button is pressed and held. Hold down this button until the function calls up. 18 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual In most procedures described throughout this manual, the dial is used for selecting items or changing values. Note however, that in most cases in which the dial can be used to change values, the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons can also be used. Basic Operation and Display Items Display Items The display shows all the current settings of the Song, Style Pattern, Voice and other related functions. Power source status USB connection status Appears when USB flash drive is connected to this instrument (page 63). Notation Normally this indicates the notes you play. When the Song Lesson function is used, this indicates the current notes and chord of playback. When the Dictionary function is used, this indicates the notes of the chord you specify. NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va.” • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown, due to space limitations in the display. The illustration is of the PSR-E453. GrandPno 001 On/off status This area indicates the on/off status of each function. Each indication is shown when the corresponding function is turned on. page 21 001 Beat Indicates the current beat of playback (page 28). Knob assignment Indicates the parameters currently assigned to the knobs (page 25). page 21 page 23 page 24 page 48 page 43 page 42 page 26 page 51 FUNCTION and MEASURE Indicates the Function number when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, or the current Measure number during playback of a Song, Style or Pattern. 001 Chord Indicates the chord which is being played in the Auto Accompaniment range (page 26) or specified via Song playback. Track status Indicates the on/off status of the current Song, Style or Pattern (pages 27, 29, 32, 51). PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 19 Quick Guide Indicates the source from which this instrument obtains power, AC adaptor or batteries (page 15). Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices This instrument features various instrumental Voices including piano. Not only can you play just one single Voice (Main Voice), but you can also layer a different Voice (Dual Voice) to the Main Voice, or play a different Voice (Split Voice) in the left-hand area of the keyboard from the right-hand area. Selecting a Main Voice 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The Voice number and name will be shown. For a list of available Voices, refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List. Playing the “Grand Piano” When you want to reset various settings to default and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Voice name Quick Guide GrandPno 001 Voice number Appears when the [VOICE] button is on. NOTE • Voice number 001 on the PSR-EW400 is “Live! Grand Piano.” 2 Use the dial to select the desired Voice. Flute 137 3 Play the keyboard. Preset Voice Types 20 001–237 Instrument Voices. 238–261 (Drum/SFX Kit) Various drum/percussion or SFX sounds are assigned to individual keys. Details on assigning instruments to keys are provided in the Drum/SFX Kit List of the separate Data List. 262–301 Used for Arpeggio performance (page 24). 302–758 XGlite Voices. 000 Selecting this automatically calls up the most suitable Voice and panel setups for the current Style, Song or Pattern. This function is called OTS (page 41). PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual The Voice for the entire keyboard will be set to 001 “Grand Piano” (PSR-E453)/ or “Live! Grand Piano” (PSR-EW400). Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Layering a Dual Voice In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.” 1 Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on. Appears when Dual is on Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas, you can play a different Voice between the Left hand and Right hand areas. 1 Press the [SPLIT] button to turn Split on. Appears when Split is on 2 Press the [DUAL] button again to exit from Dual. Quick Guide The keyboard is divided into left and right hand area at the Split Point. You can play a Split Voice on the left hand area while playing a Main Voice and Dual Voice on the right hand area of the keyboard. Two Voices will sound at the same time. Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2) Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suitable for the current Main Voice, you can also select a different Dual Voice (page 45). 036 (C1) 048 (C2) Split Voice 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Main Voice (and Dual Voice) The Split Voice (page 45) and the Split Point can be changed as desired (page 53). 2 Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit from Split. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 21 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Using the Metronome 2 A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while a click sounds the other beats. If “0” is selected, a click sounds for all beats with no chime accent. Select 6 for this example. This instrument features a built-in metronome which can be used when practicing. 1 Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome. NOTE • This parameter cannot be set during playback of a Style, Song or Pattern. 3 2 Rotate the dial to select the number of beats per measure. Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome. Press the CATEGORY [+] button once to call up “TimeSigD” (Time Signature Denominator). The length of one beat is shown on the display. Quick Guide TimeSigD Adjusting the Metronome Tempo 08 This operation lets you adjust not only the metronome tempo, but also the tempo of Style, Song and Pattern. 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up “Tempo.” The current tempo is shown on the display. Tempo The length of one beat. 4 Rotate the dial to select the length of one beat, from 2nd, 4th, 8th and 16th note. Select “08” (8th note) for this example. 5 Confirm the setting by playing the Metronome. 090 Current tempo 2 Adjust the tempo by rotating the dial. Setting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “MtrVol” (Function 061). Setting the Time Signature Here, we’ll set a time signature of 6/8 as an example. 1 Hold down the [METRONOME] button for longer than a second to call up “TimeSigN” (Time Signature Numerator). MtrVol 100 The number of beats per measure is shown on the display. TimeSigN Hold for longer than a second. 22 06 Number of beats per measure. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 061 Metronome volume 3 Rotate the dial to set the volume. Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Adding Harmony Playing each Harmony Type You can add effects such as Harmony, Tremolo and Echo to the Main Voice. For a list of the effects, refer to the Harmony Type List in the separate Data List. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn Harmony on. • Harmony type 01 to 05 Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard when ACMP is on (page 26). • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) Appears when the Harmony is on. 2 Hold down the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second until “HarmType” (Function 042) appears on the display. After a few seconds, the current Harmony type appears. HarmType Hold down two keys. Quick Guide Although turning on the Harmony will select a Harmony type suitable for the current Main Voice, you can select a different Harmony type as described in the following steps. • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) Keep holding down the keys. • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) Play the keys. 042 Hold for longer than a second. Adjusting the Harmony Volume You can adjust the Harmony volume in the Function Settings (page 60, Function 043). Trio 02 042 Current Harmony type 3 Rotate the dial to select the desired Harmony type. The operation differs depending on the Harmony type. Try playing the keyboard by referring to “How to sound each Harmony Type” at right, and the Harmony Type List. 4 Press the [HARMONY] button again to turn Harmony off. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 23 Creating Arpeggios The Arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply pressing the notes of the chord. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—to trigger interesting phrases. This feature can be used for music production as well as performance. Triggering Arpeggios 1 Press the [ARPEGGIO] button to turn on the Arpeggio function. Appears when the Arpeggio is on. Changing the Arpeggio Type The most suitable Arpeggio type is automatically selected when you select a Main Voice, but you can also select any other Arpeggio type. For a list of available Arpeggios, refer to the Arpeggio List in the separate Data List. Quick Guide 1 NOTE After a few seconds, the current Arpeggio type appears. • Selecting a Voice number between 262 and 301 will turn on Arpeggio automatically. 2 Hold down the [ARPEGGIO] button for longer than a second to call up “ARP Type” (Function 044). ARP Type Press a note or notes to trigger Arpeggio. 044 The Arpeggio phrase differs depending on the number of pressed notes and the area of the keyboard. Hold for longer than a second. SynArp1 004 044 Current Arpeggio type When Split (page 21) is on, Arpeggio is applied only to the Split Voice. When Split is off, Arpeggio is applied to the Main and Dual Voices. Arpeggio cannot be applied to the Split and Main/Dual Voices simultaneously. NOTE • Selecting a Voice number between 292 and 301 will turn on Split automatically, as well as Arpeggio. When one of those Voices is selected, Arpeggio is applied only to the Split Voice and is triggered only by playing a key to the left of the Split Point. • By assigning the Arpeggio Hold function to the footswitch, the Arpeggio will continue to play after the note is released (page 49). 3 24 To turn off the Arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO] button again. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 2 Rotate the dial to select the desired Arpeggio type. NOTE • When playing one of the Arpeggio types 117 to 150, select a Drum Kit (Voice No.238–261) as the Main Voice. Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs The two knobs can be used to add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a variety of musical ways. Select the desired pre-programmed function combination printed above the knobs, then rotate the knobs, to enjoy the sound. Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially assign the function combinations provided: (1)  (2)  (3)  (4)  (5)  (6)  (1) … etc. The current combination is shown in the display. GrandPno Using the Knobs Here is an example of how to use the knobs. For some other ideas for using the knobs, refer to page 47. 1 Select the desired Main Voice (page 20). 2 Press the [ASSIGN] button several times until z appears in the display. 3 Rotate knob B all the way to the right (maximum), then play the keyboard with your right hand while operating the knob A with your left. Here, select “Voice No.156 SquareLd” (Square Lead) as a synth-lead type Voice. 001 Filter Cutoff Current function Quick Guide Assigning Functions to the Knobs Filter Resonance The target differs depending on the selected number. Function Target 1 Filter (Cutoff, Resonance) 2 Effect (Reverb, Chorus) 3 EG (Attack, Release) 4 Style Filter Style (page 26) or Pattern (page 27) (Cutoff, Resonance) 5 Volume Balance/ Pattern Retrigger Knob A: Audio input from the external device, and Style/Pattern/ Song Knob B: Pattern 6 DSP The DSP part selected in the Function Settings (page 60, Function 041). Main Voice and Dual Voice For details about each function, refer to page 46. NOTE • Only selecting a function combination will not affect the sound even if the knob arrow is not at the center position. The selected function only works when the knob is moved. NOTICE • After selecting 1, 2 or 3 by pressing the [ASSIGN] button, changing the Voice will replace the settings created via the knobs with the default settings of the new Voice. If you want to keep the settings you have created, make sure to memorize it to Registration Memory (page 35) before selecting a different Voice. NOTE • Rotating a knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level may result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Styles This instrument includes an Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate “Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of Styles covering a wide range of musical genres. 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then use the dial to select the desired Style. 4 For the Style List, refer to the separate Data List. Play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment area to start playback. Play a melody with the right hand and chords with the left hand. Style Name Split Point BritRock 001 Style Number NOTE Quick Guide Appears when Style mode is active. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment (ACMP). • For information about how to play chords, refer to pages 54 and 55. 5 You can easily add variations to your performance by changing the section of the Style. For details, refer to page 50. Appears when the Auto Accompaniment is on. With this operation, the area of the keyboard to the left of the Split Point becomes the “Auto Accompaniment area” and is used only for specifying the chords. The rhythm part as well as the bass and chord accompaniment play back when you play chords. Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2) Using the Music Database With this function, you can easily call up suitable panel settings such as Voice and Style simply by selecting your desired music genre. 1 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. 096 (C6) Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Both the ACMP and Synchro Start are automatically turned on. Music Database name Jude Hey Auto Accompaniment area 001 The Split Point can be changed as desired (page 53). 3 Music Database number Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. EuTrance 2 057 26 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Rotate the dial to select the desired Music Database. This operation calls up panel settings, such as for Voice and Style, that are registered to the selected Music Database. For the Music Database List, refer to the separate Data List. Flashes when sync start is on. This puts the Style playback in “standby” and Style starts playing back when you play the keyboard. Appears when Music Database is in use. 3 Play the keyboard as described in steps 4–5 of the previous section. Playing with Patterns Like a DJ! The Pattern playback function lets you repeatedly play various rhythm patterns, and is particularly effective in dance music styles, such as Hip Hop, House, etc. Try out the cool DJ-like performance features—changing keys in the left-hand area of the keyboard and rotating the knobs for dynamic sound variations.  Using the Retrigger function Press the [PATTERN] button, then use the dial to select the desired Pattern. Pattern Retrigger is a function which repeats the first part of the current Pattern, for a rhythmic break effect. For details, refer to page 52. ACMP is automatically turned on, and the keyboard is divided into the Auto Accompaniment area (page 26) and melody area.  Transposing playback by pressing any note in the Auto Accompaniment area. ChartDnc Split Point 001 SECT B Flashes 2 Quick Guide 1 Specified key Press the [START/STOP] button to start Pattern playback.  Changing the sound via the Knobs Press the [ASSIGN] button several times to select “4 STYLE CUTOFF/STYLE RESONANCE” then rotate the knobs A and B. You can also start playback by pressing any note in the Auto Accompaniment area. During Pattern playback, enjoy creating sound variations via the following operations.  Turning on/off individual tracks via the [TRACK CONTROL] buttons  Playing Arpeggios in the right-hand area Press the [ARPEGGIO] button to turn it on, then press the notes in the right-hand area of the keyboard. On/off status is shown in the display (page 19) NOTE NOTE • When you select a Voice between 292 and 301, Arpeggio is applied only to the Split Voice. Playing a key to the left of the Split Point turns Arpeggio on as well as specifies the key for Pattern playback. • Up to two track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for turning on or off.  Changing the Section via the [A]–[E] buttons 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. SECT B PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Songs You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of the functions, such as Lesson.  Song Category The Songs are organized by category as listed below. • • • • • • • • Gives you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. Demonstrates many useful Voices of this instrument. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for the Song Lesson. These piano ensemble pieces are also well suited for the Song Lesson. These songs are ideal for when you want to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns. Songs you record yourself (page 32). FLASH MEMORY: Songs transferred from a computer (page 36). USB: Songs in the USB flash drive (page 62). NOTE Quick Guide • In addition to the 30 preset Songs in this instrument, you can enjoy extra Songs downloadable from the Yamaha website. For details, refer to page 11. • For instructions on transferring Songs from a computer to this instrument, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “Computer-related Operations.” The numbers are generally assigned to the Songs in the following sequence: Songs transferred from a computer, Songs in the USB flash drive. When you transfer a Song from a computer while the USB flash drive is connected to the instrument, the transferred Song will be inserted before the first USB Song number, moving all USB Song numbers later in sequence. Song name Listening to a Demo Song Jeanie Press the [DEMO] button to play Demo Songs 001– 003 in sequence. Playback will repeat continuously, starting again from the first Song (001). 013 Song number Appears when in the Style mode. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] or [ Stop) button. ] (Start/ 2 Press the [ ] (Start/Stop) button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [ button again. ] (Start/Stop) Jeanie Selecting and Playing Back a Song 013 001 Current measure 1 Press the [SONG] button, then rotate the dial to select the desired Song. For a list of available Songs, refer to the Song List in the separate Data List. You can select User Songs, Songs transferred from a computer, and Songs in the USB flash drive in the same way as above. 28 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Each arrow mark flashes in time with the beat. NOTE • External MIDI Songs containing the Portamento Control and Scale Tune settings may not be played correctly. NOTE • If playback of a Song in the USB flash drive or a Song transferred from a computer produces the distorted sound, decrease the Song volume (page 57) to reduce the distortion, and then adjust the master volume (page 16). Playing Songs Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause 3 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the end point, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button again to set the B point. The specified A-B section of the Song will now play repeatedly. [ ] Fast Forward During playback, press this button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the Song. 4 To cancel repeat playback, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button again. To stop playback, press the [ button. ] (Start/Stop) NOTE [ ] Fast Reverse During playback, press this button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the Song. [ ] Pause During playback, press this button to pause playback, and press again to start from that point. NOTE • When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast Forward will only work within the range between A and B. • The [ ], [ ] and [ ] buttons cannot be used for Demo Song playback started by using the [DEMO] button. Quick Guide • If you want to set start point “A” to the top of the Song, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button before starting playback. • If you want to set end point “B” to the end of the Song, specify only the A point and play back the Song to the end. Turning Each Track On/Off Each “track” of a Song plays a different part—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. Each of the tracks can be muted so that you can play the muted part yourself. Pressing the desired Track button repeatedly will toggle the on/off status. Playing a Specified Section of a Song Repeatedly (A-B Repeat) You can play back only a specific section of a Song repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B point (end point) in one-measure increments. A Track number on—Track will be played back B Track number off—Track is muted or contains no data 1 2 Start playback of the Song (page 28). When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the start point, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button to set the A point. NOTE • Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for turning on or off. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 29 Using the Song Lesson Feature You can use the selected Song for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Try practicing with these three Song Lesson types while referring to the music scores in the Song Book downloaded from the website (page 11). Lesson Types  Lesson 1 (LISTEN): You do not need to play the keyboard. The model melody/chords of the selected part will sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it as best as you can.  Lesson 2 (TIMING): Simply concentrate on playing the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong notes, the correct notes will sound.  Lesson 3 (WAITING): Try playing the correct notes shown on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note, and playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing. NOTE • If you want to maintain a steady playback tempo during Lesson 3, change the parameter in the Function Settings (page 61, Function 064). Quick Guide 1 Select the desired Song for your lesson (page 28). button until the desired number is shown on the display. NOTE TIMING • The Song Lesson can be applied to Songs transferred from a computer, and Songs in USB flash drive. However, some of the Lesson functions may not be applied to some Songs due to the structure of the Song data. Lp2 • The Song Lesson cannot be applied to the User Songs and the Songs other than SMF format 0. 2 The notation and key positions you should play are shown. Turn off the part you want to practice. For the right-hand lesson, press the [1/RIGHT] button to turn off the right-hand part. For the lefthand lesson, press the [2/LEFT] button to turn off the left-hand part. For lessons using both hands, turn off both parts. ForElise Right-hand lesson Track 1 is unlit 015 Left-hand lesson Track 2 is unlit Both-hands lesson Track 1 and 2 are unlit 3 Press the [LESSON] button to start playback of the Song. Pressing the [LESSON] button repeatedly will change the lesson number from 1: LISTEN  2: TIMING  3: WAITING  off  1…. Press this 30 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual In lesson 2, both-hands lesson is indicated as “LR2,” right-hand lesson is indicated as “R2” and left-hand lesson is indicated as “L2.” To stop the lesson, press the [ ] (Start/Stop) button. Even during playback, you can change the lesson number by pressing the [LESSON] button. 4 Pressing one of the TRACK CONTROL buttons repeatedly will toggle the on/off status of each part, which can be shown on the display. 007 When Song playback reaches to the end, check your evaluation Grade on the display. In lesson 2 (TIMING) and 3 (WAITING), when the Song reaches to the end, your performance will be evaluated in four levels: “Excellent!”, “Very Good!”, “Good”, “OK”. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. ~~~~~~~~ Excellent! ~~~~~~ Very Good! ~~~~ Good ~~ OK After the evaluation display is shown, the lesson will start again from the beginning. Using the Song Lesson Feature Making Practice Perfect— Repeat & Learn If you want to practice a specific section in which you made a mistake or you have difficulty with, use the Repeat & Learn function. Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a lesson. Quick Guide The Song position will move back four measures, a one-measure count will play, then Song playback will start again. Playback of the four measures will repeat with a one-measure count-in. To exit from this status, press this button again. NOTE • You can change the amount of measures the Repeat & Learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 31 Recording Your Performance You can record up to 10 of your performances to the instrument as User Songs. The recorded User Songs can be played back in the same way as the preset Songs. NOTE • This instrument records your performance and save it in an original format. If you want MIDI data, convert it to SMF by saving it to the connected USB flash drive (page 65). Track 1 will be selected as recording target of the melody, and the Track A will be selected as recording target of the accompaniment part (the chord progression for the Style or the key change for the Pattern) automatically. If a User Song was selected beforehand, recording data will overwrite Tracks 1 and A of the selected Song. Track Structure of a Song A Song can be recorded to the six tracks. You can record without specifying tracks, but you can also record each track one by one (e.g., only the righthand part or the left-hand part) to create a complete piece which may be difficult to play at once. User 1 Quick Guide  Melody Tracks [1/RIGHT]–[5] pEC The melody performance will be recorded.  Accompaniment Track [A] Flashes The chord progression (for the Style) or the key change (for the Pattern) will be recorded. 001 Flashes NOTE • The ACMP on/off status cannot be changed after the [REC] button is pressed. To exit from this status, press the [REC] button again. Melody Tracks Accompaniment Track 4 Start recording. • When you press the [SONG] button in step 2, play any note to start recording. • When you select a Style in step 2, play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment area to start recording with Style playback, or press the [START/STOP] button to start recording only with playback of the Rhythm part of a Style. Quick Recording This section explains how to record without specifying a track. This is useful when you record a new Song from scratch. • When you select a Pattern in step 2, play a key in the Accompaniment area or press the [START/STOP] button to start recording with Pattern playback. User 1 1 Make the desired settings including the Main Voice selection. 2 Make the desired settings of your performance. pEC Current measure number The current measure will be shown on the display while recording. • If you want to record only the melody performance, press the [SONG] button. • If you want to record the performance using a Style, press the [STYLE] button. • If you want to record the performance using a Pattern, press the [PATTERN] button. 3 Press the [REC] button to enter the Record Ready mode. This operation selects the lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song from 031–040 (User 1–10) as the recording target. 32 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 003 5 Press the [ ] (Start/Stop) or [REC] button to stop recording. When using a Style, you can stop recording also by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button, and then waiting until playback ends. or Recording Your Performance NOTICE • Never attempt to turn the power off when “Writing!” is shown in the display. Doing so can result in a loss of data. 6 To play back the recorded Song, press the [ ] (Start/Stop) button. Recording to a Specified Track This section explains how to record to a specified track. This is useful when you want to record the additional performances to an already recorded Song, or re-record only one track of an already recorded Song. 1 NOTE Press the [SONG] button, and then select the desired User Song from 031–040 (User 1–10) as the recording target. • When recording Pattern playback with Retrigger Note that the beat indicator in the display, metronome and Arpeggio playback are not synchronized with playback of the recorded Song. Limitations while recording • The on/off status of ACMP cannot be changed. • Playback cannot be changed between Style and Pattern. • The Pattern number can be changed while the Style number cannot. • When you use a Style/Pattern, the following parameters cannot be changed: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Time Signature, Style number and Style/Pattern Volume. • Performance with a Split Voice cannot be recorded. • The audio input from an external device (playback sound on the connected computer or audio device) cannot be recorded. User 1 031 2 Quick Guide After recording finishes, “Writing!” appears indicating that the recorded data is being stored, and then the recorded track numbers in the display will light. While holding down the [REC] button, press the desired Track button to enter the Record Ready mode. User 1 pEC Flashes 001 Selected track flashes  If you want to record only the melody: While holding down the [REC] button, press one of the [1/RIGHT]–[5] buttons. Press and hold  If you want to record only the Style playback: Press the [STYLE] button, select the desired Style, then simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [A] button. ACMP is automatically turned on. Press and hold PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 33 Recording Your Performance  If you want to record only the Pattern playback: 4 Press the [PATTERN] button, then select the desired Pattern. While holding down the [REC] button, press the [A] button. ACMP is automatically turned on. Press the [+/YES] button to clear the Song. A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display. Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song This lets you clear individual tracks from a User Song. Press and hold 3 Quick Guide Same as in steps 4 to 6 (page 32) in “Quick Recording.” 1 Press the [SONG] button, and then select the desired User Song from 031– 040 (User 1–10). 2 From [1/RIGHT]–[5] and [A], press the Track button to be cleared for longer than a second. NOTE • If the memory becomes full while recording, an alert message will appear and recording will stop automatically. In this case, delete unnecessary data by using the Clear functions (below), then execute the recording again. Clearing a User Song You can clear all tracks of a User Song. 1 Press the [SONG] button, then select the User Song from 031–040 (User 1–10) to be cleared. 2 Hold down the track [1/RIGHT] and [A] buttons simultaneously for longer than a second. Hold simultaneously for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrUser1 YES 3 34 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. To cancel this operation, press the [-] button. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Hold for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrTr1 YES 3 Press the [+/YES] button. 4 Press the [+/YES] button to clear the track. A confirmation message will appear on the display.To cancel this operation, press the [-] button. A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display. Memorizing Your Favorite Settings (Registration Memory) Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory 1 Make the desired settings, such as those for Voice, Style, and Pattern. NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the Registration Memory during Song playback. 2 Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [BANK/MEMORY] button to call up a Bank number on the display. 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Up to 32 settings (eight banks of four each) can be memorized. Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory 1 2 3 Press and release the [BANK/MEMORY] button to call up a Bank number on the display. Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select a Bank number. Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[4] buttons to call up the panel settings you memorized. Quick Guide The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or “register”) panel settings such as Voice and Style to a Registration Memory button, and then instantly recall your custom panel settings by simply pressing a single button. The registered settings for four Registration Memory buttons will be saved as a single Bank. Bank 1 Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select a Bank number. 4 While holding down the [BANK/MEMORY] button, press one of the [1]–[4] buttons to memorize the current panel settings. The recalled Registration Memory number appears in the display for a few seconds. REGIST 1 Registration Memory number 1 NOTE • When the [SONG] lamp is lit, the Style or Pattern settings will not be recalled even if you press the REGISTRATION MEMORY button to which the Style or Pattern settings are memorized. To recall Style/Pattern settings, make sure to press the [STYLE] or [PATTERN] button beforehand. Parameters that can be memorized to Registration Memory Press and hold A “Writing!” message appears indicating that the panel settings will be stored. NOTICE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. • Never attempt to turn the power off when “Writing!” is shown in the display. Doing so can result in a loss of data.  Style settings: Style number, ACMP on/off, Style volume, Track on/off, Main section A/B, Tempo  Pattern settings: Pattern number, Pattern volume, Section, Track on/off, Tempo  Voice settings: Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of the related Functions (page 58) Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the related Functions Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the related Functions  Effect settings: Reverb Type, Chorus Type  Arpeggio settings: Arpeggio on/off and all settings of the related Functions  Harmony settings: Harmony on/off and all settings of the related Functions  DSP: Parameter values of Knobs A/B and settings of the related Functions  Other settings: Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Effect Combination number, Split Point, Scale Tune PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 35 Connecting to Other Devices CAUTION • Before connecting the instrument to external devices, turn off the power of all the devices. Also, before turning the power on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum. Otherwise, damage to the devices or electrical shock may occur. Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers 4 Adjust the audio playback volume on the audio device, then adjust the entire volume by rotating the [MASTER VOLUME] control of the instrument. Quick Guide By connecting an audio device such as a portable music player to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, you can output the sound of the audio device through the built-in speakers of this instrument. This lets you play the keyboard along with the playback of your audio player. NOTE • If you want to adjust the volume balance between the audio input from the external device and Song/Style/Pattern, use the [ASSIGN] button to select Function number 5, then turn Knob A (page 46). The audio input volume from the [AUX IN] jack can also be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function 004). If you increase the volume to more than 50, the audio device sound may be distorted. NOTICE • To avoid damage to the devices, first turn on the power to the external device, and then to the instrument. When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the instrument, and then to the external device. 1 5 Connect the headphone jack of an audio device to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack by using an audio cable. Play the keyboard along with the sound of audio device. NOTE • You can cancel or lower the volume of the melody part of audio playback. For details, refer to page 37. 6 Audio device (portable music player, etc.) Adjust the volume balance between the audio device and this instrument. After finishing the performance, stop playback of the audio device. Stereo mini plug Headphone jack Audio cable Stereo mini plug Connecting to a Computer Connecting the [USB TO HOST] terminal of this instrument and the computer via a USB cable allows you to transmit/receive MIDI and Audio data to/from the computer. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “Computer-related Operations.” USB terminal NOTE [USB TO HOST] terminal • If you are using a computer or a smart device such as an iPhone/iPad, you can also connect it to the [USB TO HOST] terminal (see “Connecting to a Computer,” at right). 2 Turn on the audio device, and then this instrument. 3 Start play back of the connected audio device. The sound of the audio device is output through the speakers of this instrument. 36 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Computer Instrument USB cable Connecting to Other Devices Files that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument (and vice versa). • Song file: .mid (SMF format 0/1) • Style file: .sty • Backup file: PSR-E453.BUP* (PSR-E453)/ PSREW400.BUP* (PSR-EW400) * Backup parameters (page 39) can be transferred and saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single file. NOTE • The volume can be adjusted on the smart device, and also by using the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] control. If you want to adjust the volume balance between the audio input from the external device and Song/Style/Pattern, use the [ASSIGN] button to select Function number 5, then turn Knob A (page 46). The audio input volume from the [USB TO HOST] terminal can also be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function 005). NOTE • Up to 256 Song files can be transferred to this instrument. NOTICE • Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. • If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 60) to OFF. Otherwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the settings of the computer or the application software. Using the Melody Suppressor When you output the audio sound of an external audio device or a computer connected to the [AUX IN] jack or the [USB TO HOST] terminal through this instrument, you can cancel or lower the volume of the melody part of audio playback. You can use the function to practice the melody part along with the audio playback. 1 Play back audio on the connected external device. 2 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button to turn it on. NOTE • The volume can be adjusted on the computer, and also by using the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] control. If you want to adjust the volume balance between the audio input from the external device and Song/Style/Pattern, use the [ASSIGN] button to select Function number 5, then turn Knob A (page 46). The audio input volume from the [USB TO HOST] terminal can also be adjusted in the Function Settings (page 58, Function 005). MelodySP on NOTE • Depending on the particular music source, the melody or vocal sound may not be cancelled as expected even when if the Melody Suppressor is turned on. In such a case, try adjusting the pan position to be cancelled in the Function Settings (page 59, Function 039). Connecting to an iPhone/iPad You can use a smart device, such as an iPhone or iPad, with the instrument for a variety of musical purposes by connecting it to the instrument’s [USB TO HOST] terminal. For details on connections, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.” For information about the compatible smart devices and application tools, access the following page: http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/ • When the instrument is connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, and Audio Loop Back (page 60, Function 058) is set to OFF, the Melody Suppressor function cannot be used. 3 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button again to turn it off. NOTICE • If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 60) to OFF. Otherwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the settings of the computer or the application software. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 37 Quick Guide • If you transfer a Style file from the computer to this instrument, you need to load it to this instrument for Style playback. For details, refer to “Loading a Style File” (page 67). Connecting to Other Devices Using an External Stereo System for Playback (OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks) (PSR-EW400) You can connect a stereo system to amplify the instrument’s sound by using the OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks. Powered speaker Quick Guide Phone plug (standard) Speaker Mute On/Off Setting (PSR-EW400) You can set whether the sound of this instrument is always output from its built-in speaker or not. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “SP Mute” (Function 067). Input jack SP Mute Phone plug (standard) OFF 067 Audio signal Audio cable You can use the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. NOTE • Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance. NOTE • Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device. NOTICE • To avoid possible damage, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the external device, then to the instrument. Since this instrument’s power may automatically be turned off due to the Auto Power Off function (page 16), turn off the power to the external device, or disable Auto Power Off when you do not intend to operate the instrument. NOTICE • Do not route the output from the OUTPUT jacks to the [AUX IN] jack. If you make this connection, the signal input at the [AUX IN] jack is output from the [OUTPUT] jacks and then back again, creating a feedback loop that could make normal performance impossible, and may even damage the equipment. 38 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 3 Use the dial to select the desired setting. When Speaker Mute set to “ON,” the Speaker sound is off. You can only hear the instrument sound via the headphones or an external device connected to the [OUTPUT] jacks. When Speaker Mute set to “OFF,” the speaker sound is always on as long as headphones are not connected. Backup and Initialization Backup parameters • User Songs (page 32) • Style data transferred from a computer and loaded to Style numbers 221–230 (page 67) • Registration Memory (page 35) • FUNCTION Settings: (page 58) Tuning, Split Point, Touch Response, Style Volume, Song Volume, Pattern Volume, Metronome Volume, Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Master EQ type, Audio Loop Back on/off, Your Tempo on/off, Auto Power Off Time, Battery Type, Language In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the data (including Style data that have not been loaded) transferred from the connected computer will be maintained even if you turn off the power. Initializing the Instrument You can erase the backup parameters described above, and then restores all the default factory settings. You can initialize the instrument via the following two methods. Backup Clear This operation initializes the backup parameters. While holding down the highest white key, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. PSR-E453 Quick Guide Backup Parameters The following Backup parameters will be maintained even if the power is turned off. The highest white key PSR-EW400 Flash Clear This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that have been transferred from a computer. Note that Style data loaded to Style numbers 221–230 will be maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest white key and the three highest black keys, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. PSR-E453 The highest white key and the three highest black keys PSR-EW400 NOTICE • Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you have purchased. Be sure to save important data to a computer. For details, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “Computer-related Operations.” PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 39 Handy Performance Features Reference Selecting a Reverb Type Selecting a Chorus Type The Reverb effect lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the optimum Reverb type for the entire sound, you can select a different Reverb type manually. The Chorus effect creates a thick sound that sounds like many of the same Voices being played in unison. Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the optimum Chorus type for the entire sound, you can select a different Chorus type manually. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Reverb” (Function 036). 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Chorus” (Function 037). After a few seconds, the current Reverb type appears. After a few seconds, the current Chorus type appears. Reverb Chorus 036 037 Hall2 02 Chorus1 1 036 Current Reverb type Current Chorus type Reference NOTE NOTE • Some Songs and Styles use Chorus Types which cannot be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display. • Some Songs and Styles use Reverb Types which cannot be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display. 3 40 Rotate the dial to select a Reverb type. Play the keyboard to check the sound. For information about the available Reverb types, refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List. 037 3 Rotate the dial to select a Chorus type. Play the keyboard to check the sound. For information about the available Chorus types, refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List. Adjusting the Reverb depth Adjusting the Chorus depth You can adjust the Reverb depth applied to the Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the same operations above. Regarding the item in step 2, refer to the Function List on page 59. You can adjust the Chorus depth applied to the Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the same operations above. Regarding the item in step 2, refer to the Function List on page 59. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Pitch Controls—Transpose The overall pitch of the instrument (except for the Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. 1 Press the [TRANSPOSE] button to call up “Transpos” (Function 006). Pitch Controls—the [PITCH BEND] wheel The [PITCH BEND] wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. Transpos 00 Use the dial to set the Transpose value between -12 and +12. You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel in the Function Settings (page 58, Function 008). Pitch Controls—Fine Tuning The overall tuning of the instrument (except for the Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down between 427.0 Hz and 453.0 Hz in approximately 0.2 Hz increments. The default value is 440.0 Hz. 1 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Calling Up Optimum Panel Settings—One Touch Setting (OTS) Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Tuning” (Function 007). Select a Song, Style or Pattern by pressing the [SONG], [STYLE] or [PATTERN] button, then select Voice number 000 OTS (page 20). This lets you automatically call up the optimum panel settings such as Voice and tempo for the current Song, Style or Pattern. Tuning 007 3 Use the dial to set the Tuning value. 440.0Hz 007 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 41 Reference 2 006 Handy Performance Features Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound The keyboard of this instrument is equipped with a Touch Response feature that lets you dynamically and expressively control the level of the Voices according to your playing strength. Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button for longer than a second to call up “Master EQ” (Function 038). After a few seconds, the current Master EQ type appears. Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “TouchRes” (Function 010). MasterEQ After a few seconds, the current Touch Response appears. 038 Hold for longer than a second. TouchRes 010 Speaker 1 Medium 2 038 Current Master EQ type 010 Reference Current Touch Response 2 Rotate the dial to select the desired Master EQ type. Master EQ types 3 Use the dial to select a Touch Response setting between 1 and 4. Touch Response 42 1 Soft Allows maximum loudness to be produced with relatively light key pressure. 2 Medium Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response. 3 Hard Requires that the keys be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness. 4 Fixed All notes are produced at the same volume no matter how hard the keyboard is played. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 1 Speaker Optimum for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers. 2 Headphone Optimum for headphones, or for listening via external speakers. 3 Boost Features more powerful sound. Depending on the selected Voice and Style, etc., the sound may be more subject to distortion than other EQ types. 4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance. 5 Bright Lowers the mid range for a brighter sound. 6 Mild Lowers the high range for a softer sound. Scale Tuning By default, the scale of this keyboard is set to Equal Temperament — the same tuning as with any acoustic piano. However, the setting can be changed to any other scale according to the music genre or music style you want to play. Selecting a Scale You can select a desired scale among the various preset scales. 1 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Setting the Base Note for Each Scale Please make sure to specify the appropriate base note, if you select a scale other than Equal Temperament, or create an original scale via Scale Tune function. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button to call up “BaseNote” (Function 049). Use the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button to call up “Scale” (Function 048). After a few seconds, the current scale appears. Scale 048 After a few seconds, the current base note appears. BaseNote Equal 1 049 048 Current scale Rotate the dial to select a scale. 01 The default setting is “1 Equal.” Equal 2 Pure Major 3 Pure Minor 4 Bayat (Arabic) 5 Rast (Arabic) 049 Current base note Preset Scale types 1 Reference C 3 3 Rotate the dial to select a base note from C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb and B. The default setting is “C.” PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 43 Scale Tuning Tuning Each Note to Create an Original Scale 5 The setting can be reset to the initial default value by pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously. You can tune the individual notes in cents (a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone) to create your original scale. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Rotate the dial to tune the note over a range of -64 to +63. 6 Repeat steps 2–5 as desired. 7 Memorize the settings here to the Registration Memory as desired (page 35). NOTE 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “TuneNote” (Function 050). After a few seconds, the current note appears. TuneNote 050 C 01 050 Current tuning note Reference 3 Rotate the dial to select the note to be tuned from C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb, B. 4 Press the CATEGORY [+] button to call up “Tune” (Function 051). After a few seconds, the tuning value of the note selected in step 3 appears. Tune 051 Tune C 00 Tuning value 44 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 051 • When pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously after recalling an original scale memorized to Registration Memory, the scale will return to the original scale registered to Registration Memory, not to the default tune value. • When calling up “Scale” (Function 048) after using individual note scale tuning, “(Edited)” will be shown in the display. However, the edited scale settings will be erased by calling up another scale. For this reason, the edited settings should be memorized to the Registration Memory. Voice Settings Selecting a Dual Voice Voice Editing 1 For each of the Main, Dual and Split Voices, you can edit the parameters such as volume, octave and depth of the Reverb and Chorus, allowing you to create new, custom sounds that best suit your musical needs. Hold down the [DUAL] button for longer than a second to call up “D.Voice” (Function 020). After a few seconds, the current Dual Voice appears. D.Voice 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up the desired item. 020 Hold for longer than a second. 071 020 Voice parameters are indicated as below. • Main Voice parameters: M.****** (Function 011–019) • Dual Voice parameters: D.****** (Function 020–029) • Split Voice parameters: S.****** (Function 030–035) For details on each parameter, refer to the Function List on page 59. Current Dual Voice 2 Rotate the dial to select the desired Dual Voice. Selecting a Split Voice 1 Hold down the [SPLIT] button for longer than a second to call up “S.Voice” (Function 030). After a few seconds, the current Split Voice appears. S.Voice 030 Hold for longer than a second. FngrBass 054 030 Current Split Voice 2 M.Volume 064 011 3 Rotate the dial to set the value. 4 Repeat steps 2–3 above to edit various parameters. 5 If necessary, memorize the settings to the Registration Memory (page 35). Reference Chamber Check the sound by playing the keyboard. The Voice-related settings are reset when a different Voice is selected. If you want to store the created sound for future recall, memorize the settings to the Registration Memory. Rotate the dial to select the desired Split Voice. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 45 Parameters Assigned to the Knobs This section describes each of the parameters which can be assigned to the Knobs (page 25). z Filter NOTE Filter effects shape the sound by allowing only a specified range of frequencies to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” frequency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like sounds. NOTE • These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played on the keyboard. • Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies. • These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played on the keyboard. c EG (Envelope Generator) Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sustain to best match the music you’re playing.  Knob A: CUTOFF Level Adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of the sound. Turning the knob to the left makes the sound more muffled or darker, while turning the knob A to the right makes the sound brighter. Sustain Level Level ATTACK Cutoff Frequency DECAY Key Played RELEASE Time Key Released  Knob A: ATTACK Frequencies in this range are passed. Frequency Frequencies in this range are cut off.  Knob B: RESONANCE Reference Adjusts the amount of Resonance applied at the filter’s cutoff frequency. Turning the knob to the right will increases the Resonance to emphasize the frequencies at the cutoff frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the filter. Level Adjusts the Attack Time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach maximum level when a key is played). Turning the knob to the right increases the Attack Time, thus slowing down the attack rate.  Knob B: RELEASE Adjusts the Release Time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to decay to silence after a key is released). Turning the knob to the right increases the Release Time, thus making a longer sustain. NOTE Resonance • These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played on the keyboard. v Frequency x Effect b Volume Balance/Pattern Retrigger  Knob A: REVERB  Knob A: VOLUME BALANCE Reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club. Turning the knob to the right increases the Reverb depth. Adjusts the volume balance between the audio playback volume from the connected audio device (page 36) or the computer (page 36) and the Song/Style/ Pattern. Turning the knob to the left decreases the external audio volume, while turning it to the right decreases the instrument volume.  Knob B: CHORUS Produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect. Turning the knob to the right increases the Chorus depth. 46 Style Filter Same as z. These effects are applied only to Style or Pattern playback. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Parameters Assigned to the Knobs Even when there is no audio input from an external device, the volume of Song, Style and Pattern can be adjusted by using the knob. The volume of Voices played on the keyboard cannot be adjusted. NOTE • When the instrument is connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, and Audio Loop Back (page 60, Function 058) is set to OFF, you cannot adjust the volume of audio playback input from the external device.  Knob B: RETRIGGER RATE Adjusts the Retrigger Rate (the length of the part to be repeated) of the Pattern Retrigger function (page 52). Turning this knob to the right decreases it, and turning the knob to the left increases it. n DSP  Knob A/B: DSP PARAMETER A/B With the digital effects built into the instrument, you can add DSP effects to your keyboard performance and the playback sound of Style, etc. (page 48). Each effect has two parameters which are assigned to Knobs A and B. By turning the knobs in real-time, you can alter the music in various dynamic ways, such as changing the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker or changing the degree of the Distortion. NOTE • When setting the tempo of the Pattern playback to more than 200, turning the knob to the right cannot change the length to be repeated. The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects that can be assigned to the knobs. Some Ideas for Using the Knobs Try This Filter Select “143 Gemini” (a synth-lead type Voice) or “170 Noise” (page 20). Turning Knobs A or B while playing gives you the dynamic filter-sweep effects of an analog synthesizer. Effect Select the Voice “008 CP80.” Turn Knobs A and B all the way down to hear the direct, unprocessed sound of the Voice. As you turn Knob B toward the right, a Chorus effect with modulation is gradually applied to the sound. Turning Knob A to the right adds a Reverb effect that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall. c EG Select the Voice “173 RSAnPad.” Turning Knob A all the way down makes the attack faster, and lets you hear the crisp, clear sound of the original Voice. Turning Knob B all the way down shortens the amount of time for the sound to decay to silence after a key is released. These knobs let you finely adjust the Voice to create the appropriate sound for the particular song you’re playing. v Style Filter Select the Style, “057 EuTrance.” Turn on the [ACMP ON/OFF] button and start Style playback (page 26). Set Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be a bit muffled compared to the original, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact. z x b n Volume Balance/ Pattern Retrigger DSP Reference Number/Effect Knob A: Connect an audio device or a computer (page 36), then turn this knob while playing audio on the external device. You can adjust the volume balance between the performance on this instrument and the audio input. Knob B: Select the Section C of the Pattern “002 FrenchDJ” and start Pattern playback. Turn this knob to the right while holding down the Section button C, and you can progressively shorten the Retrigger rate like a DJ would in performance. Select the Voice, “019 Cool!Org.” Press the [DSP] button to turn the DSP on, then set the DSP type (Function 040) to “01 RotarySp,” and the DSP part (Function 041) to “1 Keyboard” (page 60). Adjust the effect depth by turning Knob B while playing the keyboard, then use Knob A to change the rotating speed of the rotary speaker. When you move it slowly, you can create gradual speed changes like on a real rotary speaker. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 47 Parameters Assigned to the Knobs Adding DSP Effects DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor. DSP effects are applied only to a specified part as described below. 3 Rotate the dial to select a DSP type. 4 Press the CATEGORY [+] button once to call up “DSP Part” (Function 041). Parts to which DSP effects are applied After a few seconds, the current part to which the DSP effects are applied appears.  When selecting the “Keyboard” part for DSP DSP part: Keyboard • Main Voice • Dual Voice • Track 1 of a User Song DSP part: Style • Style • Pattern • Track A of a User Song DSP Part DSP • ON/OFF • Type 041 Output Output Keyboard  When selecting the “Style” part for DSP DSP part: Keyboard • Main Voice • Dual Voice • Track 1 of a User Song DSP part: Style • Style • Pattern • Track A of a User Song Output DSP • ON/OFF • Type 1 5 Press the [DSP] button to turn DSP on. Reference Appears when the DSP is on. Although turning on DSP will select a DSP type suitable for the current panel setting, you can select a different DSP type as described in the following steps. 2 Hold down the [DSP] button for longer than a second to call up “DSP Type” (Function 040). After a few seconds, the current DSP type appears. DSP Type 040 Hold for longer than a second. RotarySp 01 040 Current DSP type 48 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 041 Current Part Output Rotate the dial to select a part to which the DSP effects are applied. Refer to the chart of “Parts to which DSP effects are applied” (see left), and select “Keyboard” or “Style.” This parameter is set in step 5. 1 For information about the available DSP types, refer to the Effect Type List in the Data List. 6 Press the [ASSIGN] button several times to assign Function 6 to the knobs (page 25). 7 Turn the knobs while playing the part selected in step 5 to see how the DSP effects change. 8 Press the [DSP] button again to turn DSP off. Limitations when recording a Song • DSP effects can be recorded only to Tracks 1 and A. • The DSP type and part cannot be changed while recording. • When recording to an existing User Song, if the part to which the DSP effects are applied differs from the recording tracks, DSP related setting data (DSP part, type, parameter A/B) will not be recorded or overwritten. • The DSP effects may not be applied as expected when a User Song is being played back. This is because the DSP effects are affected by the data recorded to the User Song. Arpeggio Settings Synchronizing an Arpeggio to Song/Style/Pattern Playback— Arpeggio Quantize When you play the keyboard to trigger an Arpeggio (page 24) along with Song/Style/Pattern playback, you’ll need to play the notes with correct timing to keep the Arpeggio in synchronization with the other playback tracks. However, your actual timing may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat (or both). The “Arpeggio Quantize” function of this instrument will correct any slight imperfections in the timing (according to settings below), and then play back the Arpeggio appropriately. Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback continues even after the note has been released, by pressing the footswitch connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Pdl Func” (Function 047). • Synchronizing to quarter notes • Synchronizing to 8th notes • No synchronization After a few seconds, the current pedal setting appears. Although the Arpeggio Quantize value is pre-programmed for each Arpeggio Type, you can change the value manually. 1 Pdl Func 047 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Sustain 1 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Quantize” (Function 046). After a few seconds, the current Arpeggio Quantize value appears. Current setting 3 2 046 046 Current value Rotate the dial to select a value from “OFF,” “1/8” and “1/16.” • 1/8 • 1/16 • OFF 047 If you want to restore the footswitch function to sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.” 1/8 3 Rotate the dial to select “Arp Hold.” Arp Hold Quantize 2 Reference 2 047 4 Try playing Arpeggio with the footswitch. Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then press the footswitch. Even if you release the notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch. Synchronizing to quarter notes Synchronizing to 8th notes No synchronization PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 49 Style and Pattern Settings Style Variations—Sections Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. INTRO MAIN A/B ENDING AUTO FILL INTRO This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the Intro finishes, Style playback shifts to the Main section. The length of the Intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the Song. Playback of the Main section repeats indefinitely until another Section’s button is pressed. There are two variations (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically in response on the chords you play with your left hand. AUTO FILL This is automatically added before changing to Main A or B. ENDING This is used for the ending of the Song. When the Ending finishes, the Style playback stops automatically. The length of the Ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. Reference 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then rotate the dial to select a Style. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. Beat arrows flash. To turn off Synchro Start, press the [SYNC START] button.  Synchro Start Appears when ACMP is turned on. When Synchro Start is on, Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B. MAIN A Current Section (Main A or B) 50 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Style and Pattern Settings 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A Now, you’re ready to start Style playback of the Intro and then the Main A (or B) section. 6 Style Synchro Stop When you press the [SYNC STOP] button to turn on this function, the Style will only play while pressing chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. Releasing all the notes will stop Style playback. Play a chord with your left hand to start playback of the Intro. For information on how to play chords, see “Chords” on page 54. Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. Split Point NOTE • This function can be used when ACMP is turned on. Auto Accompaniment area After the Intro finishes, play the keyboard according to the progression of the Song you are playing. Play chords with your left hand while playing melodies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/ AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B. As printed on the front panel, a Style consists of six tracks. Turn on/off each track via the TRACK CONTROL buttons. Each of the tracks can be muted so that you can play the muted part yourself. Pressing the desired Track button repeatedly will toggle the on/ off status. Reference 7 Turning Each Style Track On/Off FILL A≥B 8 On/off status is shown in the display (page 19) Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. ENDING NOTE • Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for turning Tracks on or off. The Section switches to the Ending. When the Ending is finished, Style playback stops automatically. You can have the Ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing back. NOTE • Style numbers 196, 208–220 have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. When one of these Styles is selected, turn ACMP on, then specify the chord in the left hand area to play Style parts other than the Rhythm part. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 51 Style and Pattern Settings Pattern Variations—Sections Changing the Tempo Like the Styles, each Pattern features several Sections, allowing you to add dynamic variations to the performance. Five Sections (A–E) are provided. A Style or Pattern can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value in the display. Tempo Unlike the Styles, however, Patterns do not have the Sections dedicated to the beginning or ending of the Song, such as Intro and Ending. All Sections A–E will play back repeatedly until stopped manually. Pattern Retrigger Function This function restarts Pattern playback from the beginning. 1 Press the [PATTERN] button, then rotate the dial to select the desired Pattern. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button or press any key in the Auto Accompaniment area to start Pattern playback (page 27). Reference 3 By pressing the button of the currently playing Section, you can restart playback from the beginning. Holding down the button lets loop-play only the top portion of the Section. 090 Current Tempo 2 Rotate the dial to set a tempo from 011 to 280. Pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously can instantly reset the value to the default tempo of the current Style or Pattern. You can change the tempo during playback by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the required tempo. NOTE • The above operation applies also to Song or Arpeggio playback tempo. Tap Start You can start play back of the Style, Pattern or Song by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4 (4/4, etc.), and three times for time signatures in 3 (3/ 4, etc.). NOTE • Tap tempo setting range: 32–280 The top portion length (Retrigger Rate) can be changed by using the knob (page 47). NOTE • When recording Pattern playback with the Retrigger function, note that the beat indicator in the display, metronome and Arpeggio playback is not synchronized with playback of the recorded Song. 52 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Style and Pattern Settings Adjusting the Volume of the Style or Pattern SplitPnt 054 009 You can adjust the volume balance between Style or Pattern playback and your keyboard performance. 1 2 Split Point Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Rotate the dial to set the Split Point between 036 (C1) and 096 (C6) (on the PSR-E453) or 028 (E0) and 103 (G6) (on the PSR-EW400). Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “StyleVol” (Function 001) or “PatrnVol” (Function 003). Split Point ... default value: 054 (F#2) StyleVol 001 Style (or Pattern) volume 3 Rotate the dial to set the volume between 000 and 127. Setting the Split Point The point on the keyboard that separates the lefthand area and the right-hand area of the keyboard is called the “Split Point.” The left-hand area is used to specify the chord for Style playback, to specify the key for Pattern playback, or to play the Split Voice. The default Split Point is key number 054 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “SplitPnt” (Function 009). You can call up this display also by pressing the [STYLE] then holding the [ACMP] button for longer than a second. 036 (C1) 060 (C3) 048 (C2) Split Voice, chords (Style) or keys (Pattern) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Main Voice (and Dual Voice) NOTE • During the Lesson playback, the Split Point cannot be changed. Playing Chords Without Style Playback (Stop Accompaniment) If you press the [STYLE] button, press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on (the ACMP ON icon appears), and play the chord in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard (with SYNC START off), the chord sound will be heard without Style playback. This is referred to as “Stop Accompaniment.” The specified chord will be shown in the display, and affects the Harmony function (page 23). Appears when auto accompaniment is on Auto Accompaniment area Specified chord PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 53 Reference 100 Style and Pattern Settings Chord Types for Style Playback For users who are new to chords, this chart features common chords. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.  indicates the root note. Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh Reference C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 • Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, m7(11), 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2 • Inversion of the 7sus4 chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted. • When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm and bass parts will be played. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. 54 Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). Style and Pattern Settings 2-2. Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is useful when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press the key labeled “M7” in the section between “CHORD TYPE” and “ROOT.” The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are conveniently shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Press and hold the [LESSON] button for longer than a second to call up “Dict.” Dict. Hold for longer than a second. Notation of chord This operation will divide the entire keyboard into the three ranges as illustrated below. Chord Type range Dict. Root range 001 Individual notes of chord (keyboard) The highest key • The range to the right of “ROOT”: Lets you specify the chord root, but produces no sound. • The range between “CHORD TYPE” and “ROOT”: Lets you specify the chord type, but produces no sound. • The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE”: Lets you play and confirm the chord specified in the above two ranges. 2 As an example, learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. 2-1. Press the “G” key in the section to the right of “ROOT” so that the “G” is shown as the root note. To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+/YES] or [-/NO] button. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to press the key of “M” (major) after pressing the root note. 3 Reference Keyboard playing range Chord name (root and type) Following the notation and keyboard diagram in the display, try playing a chord in the range to the left of “CHORD TYPE.” When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. Specifying only the key for Pattern playback Note that you need to specify only the root note for Pattern playback, unlike Style playback for which you also need to specify the chord type. Dict. 001 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 55 Song Settings BGM (Background Music) Playback Random Song Playback With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button will play back only a few of the internal Songs repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for example, all internal Songs are played, or all Songs transferred to the instrument from a computer are played back, letting you use the instrument as a background music source. Five playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs. 1 The order of Song repeat playback via the [DEMO] button can be changed between the numerical order and random order. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “PlayMode” (Function 066). Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer than a second to call up “DemoGrp.” After a few seconds, the current playback mode appears. After a few seconds, the current repeat playback group appears. PlayMode 066 DemoGrp 065 When the DemoGrp is set to “Demo,” this parameter cannot be set. Hold for longer than a second. 2 Rotate the dial to select a repeat playback group from the table below. Reference Demo Preset Songs 001–003 Preset All preset Songs User All User Songs Download All Songs transferred from a computer USB All Songs (MIDI files) in the connected USB flash drive NOTE • When User Songs, Download Songs and USB Songs data do not exist, Demo Songs are played back. 3 Press the [DEMO] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again. 56 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 3 Rotate the dial to select “Random.” 4 Press the [DEMO] button to start playback. To return to the numerical order, select “Normal.” To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again. Song Settings This operation is same as that of the Style and Pattern. Refer to page 52. Tap Start This operation is same as that of the Style and Pattern. Refer to page 52. Melody Voice Setting of the Preset Song You can change the Melody Voice of the current Preset Song temporarily to any other desired Voice. 1 Press the [SONG] button, select the desired Preset Song, then start playback (page 28). 2 Press the [VOICE] button, then rotate the dial to select the desired Voice. Song Volume Strings 1 070 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “SongVol” (Function 002). Hold down the [VOICE] button for longer than a second to call up “SONG MELODY VOICE.” After a few seconds, the Melody Voice of the Song will be changed to that selected in step 2. SongVol 100 SONG MEL 002 Song volume 3 Rotate the dial to set the Song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while in the Song mode. Hold for longer than a second. Reference Tempo Setting of the Song NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody Voice. • You cannot change the Melody Voice of a User Song. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 57 The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. Find the desired item in the Function List on pages 58–61, then follow the instructions below. Basic Procedure in the Function Display 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. To restore the default value, press the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously. In the sole case of the MIDI Initial Send function (Function 057), pressing the [+/YES] button executes the function while pressing [-/NO] cancels it. Direct numeric entry 2 Press the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button several times until the desired item appears. Current item SplitPnt 054 009 • Decrement value by 1 • Cancel Current Function number 3 Use the dial, the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the value of the selected function. Press simultane- • Increment ously to recall the value by 1 default setting. • Execute Some Function settings are maintained even if you turn off the power, and can be transferred to a computer as Backup Data (page 39). NOTE Reference • To exit from a Function display, press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG] or [PATTERN] button. Function List Function Number PSRE453 PSREW400 Function Display Range/Settings Default Value Description Volume 001 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 53. 002 002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 57. 003 003 Pattern Volume PatrnVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 53. 004 004 [AUX IN] Audio Volume AuxInVol 000–127 50 Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [AUX IN] jack (page 36). 005 005 [USB TO HOST] Audio Volume USBInVol 000–127 100 Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [USB TO HOST] terminal (page 36, 37). 00 Refer to page 41. Overall 58 006 006 Transpose Transpos -12–12 007 007 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 008 008 Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 009 009 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6; PSR-E453)/ 028–103 (E0–G6; PSR-EW400) 010 010 Touch Response TouchRes 1 (Soft), 2 (Medium), 3 (Hard), 4 (Fixed) PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 440.0Hz 02 Refer to page 41. Sets the range over which you can control pitch by using the [PITCH BEND] wheel (page 41), in semitone increments. 054 (F#2) Refer to page 53. 2 (Medium) Refer to page 42. The Functions Function Number PSRE453 Function PSREW400 Display Range/Settings Default Value Description Main Voice (page 20) 011 011 Volume M.Volume 000–127 * 012 012 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. 013 013 Pan M.Pan * Determines the stereo pan position of the Main Voice. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. 014 014 Reverb Depth M.Reverb 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice's signal is sent to the Reverb effect. 015 015 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 016 016 Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 064 Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice reaches the Attack level when the note is pressed. The larger the value, the slower the attack rate. The smaller the value, the faster the attack rate. 017 017 Release Time M.Releas 000–127 064 Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice falls to 0 when the note is released. The larger the value, the longer the sustain. The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain. 018 018 Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (page 46) of the Main Voice. 019 019 Filter Resonance M.Reso. 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Resonance (page 46) of the Main Voice. 000 (left)– 064 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the volume of the Main Voice. 020 020 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–758 * Selects a Dual Voice. 021 021 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. 022 022 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. * Determines the stereo pan position of the Dual Voice. A value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right. 000 (left)– 064 (center)– 127 (right) 023 023 Pan D.Pan 024 024 Reverb Depth D.Reverb 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. 025 025 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 026 026 Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 064 Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice reaches the Attack level when the note is pressed. The larger the value, the slower the attack rate. The smaller the value, the faster the attack rate. 027 027 Release Time D.Releas 000–127 064 Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice falls to 0 when the note is released. The larger the value, the longer the sustain. The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain. 028 028 Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (page 46) of the Dual Voice. 029 029 Filter Resonance D.Reso. 000–127 064 Determines the Filter Resonance (page 46) of the Dual Voice. 001–758 054 (FngrBass) Reference Dual Voice (page 21) Split Voice (page 21) 030 030 Split Voice S.Voice 031 031 Volume S.Volume 000–127 032 032 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 033 033 Pan S.Pan 034 034 Reverb Depth 035 035 000 (left)– 064 (center)– 127 (right) 080 -1 Selects a Split Voice. Determines the volume of the Split Voice. Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. 064 Determines the stereo pan position of the Split Voice. A value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right. S.Reverb 000–127 008 Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 000 Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Effects 036 036 Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 ** Refer to page 40. 037 037 Chorus Type Chorus 1–6 ** Refer to page 40. 038 038 Master EQ Type MasterEQ 1 (Speaker), 2 (Headphone), 3 (Boost), 4 (Piano), 5 (Bright), 6 (Mild) 1 (Speaker) Refer to page 42. 039 039 Melody Suppressor SupprPan L63, L62...L02, L01, C, R01, R02...R62, R63 C Determines the pan position to be cancelled when the Melody Suppressor (page 37) is turned on. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 59 The Functions Function Number PSRE453 Function PSREW400 Display Range/Settings Default Value Description DSP (page 48) 040 040 DSP Type DSP Type 01–10 041 041 DSP Part DSP Part 1 (Keyboard) 2 (Style) 01 1 (Keyboard) Refer to page 48. Harmony (page 23) 042 042 Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 * Determines the Harmony type. 043 043 Harmony Volume HarmVol * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. * Determines the Arpeggio type. 000–127 Arpeggio (page 24) 044 044 Arpeggio Type ARP Type 001–150 045 045 Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo 1 (Original), 2 (Thru) 046 046 Arpeggio Quantize Quantize 047 047 Pedal Function 1 (Sustain) / Pdl Func 2 (Arp Hold) / 3 (Hold+Sus) 1 (OFF), 2 (1/8), 3 (1/16) Depending on the Arpeggio type When “Thru” is selected, the velocities of Arpeggio playback are determined by your playing strength. When “Original” is selected, the velocities of Arpeggio playback are determined by the original setting regardless of your playing strength. Depending on the Arpeggio type Refer to page 49. * Refer to page 49. 1 (Equal) Refer to page 43. Refer to page 43. Scale Tuning (page 43) Reference 048 048 Scale Scale 1 (Equal), 2 (Pure Maj), 3 (Pure min), 4 (Bayat), 5 (Rast) 049 049 Base Note BaseNote 01 (C), 02 (C#), 03 (D), 04 (Eb), 05 (E), 06 (F), 07 (F#), 08 (G), 09 (Ab), 10 (A), 11 (Bb), 12(B) 01 (C) 050 050 Tuning Note TuneNote 01 (C), 02 (C#), 03 (D), 04 (Eb), 05 (E), 06 (F), 07 (F#), 08 (G), 09 (Ab), 10 (A), 11 (Bb), 12(B) 01 (C) 051 051 Tuning Tune -64–63 052 052 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your keyboard performance to application software on a computer via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF. 053 053 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your keyboard performance to application software on a computer via MIDI, set this parameter to ON. 054 054 Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF ON Determines whether MIDI messages generated via keyboard performance are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. 055 055 Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF OFF Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Style playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. 056 056 Song Out SongOut OFF Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Song playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. 057 057 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO - Audio Loop Back LoopBack ON/OFF ON Refer to page 44. Depending on the Scale MIDI ON/OFF Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should be done immediately after starting the Recording operation on a computer. Audio (page 36) 058 60 058 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Determines whether Audio sound input from the [USB TO HOST] terminal is returned to the computer or not with the performance played on the instrument. If you want to output only the sound played on this instrument to the computer, set this parameter to OFF. The Functions Function Number PSRE453 Function PSREW400 Display Range/Settings Default Value Description Metronome (page 22) 059 059 Time Signature Numerator TimesigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome. ** Determines the length of each metronome beat. 060 060 Time Signature Denominator Half note, Quarter TimesigD note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note 061 061 Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson (page 30) 062 062 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16, OFF 01 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0, in USB flash drive or transferred from a computer. 063 063 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16, OFF 02 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0, in USB flash drive or transferred from a computer. 064 064 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON This parameter is for Lesson 3 (WAITING). When set to ON, playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained regardless of the speed at which you are playing. Demo Group DemoGrp Demo Play Mode 1 (Normal) PlayMode 2 (Random) Demo (page 28) 065 066 065 066 1 (Demo) / 2 (Preset) / 3 (User) / 4 (Download) / 5 (USB) 1 (Demo) Refer to page 56. 1 (Normal) Refer to page 56. OFF Refer to page 38. Speaker Mute (page 38) – 067 Speaker Mute SP Mute ON/OFF Auto Power Off (page 16) 067 068 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/ 120 (min.) 30 minutes Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is automatically turned off. 1 (Alkaline) / 2 (Ni-MH) 1 (Alkaline) Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument. English Determines the language for the Song file names. Determines the language for the name of the files in the USB flash drive or the files loaded from a computer. Battery (page 14) 068 069 Battery Type Battery Type 069 070 Language Language English/Japanese Reference Language (page 63) * The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice. ** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Pattern. NOTE • The settings of “MIDI” and “Audio” is useful when an external device such as a computer is connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal (page 36). PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 61 USB Flash Drive Operations By connecting the USB flash drive (sold separately) to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, you can save the data created on this instrument, such as User Song and parameter settings. The saved data can be recalled to this instrument again for the future use. IMPORTANT • You should use an AC adaptor when executing USB flash drive operations, since battery power may not be reliable enough to last through these crucial operations. When you try executing certain functions, the “UseAdpt” indication may appear and the selected function cannot be executed. Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE • For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.  Compatible USB devices • USB flash drive Other USB devices such as a USB hub, computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://download.yamaha.com/ Reference Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on this instrument, the amount of time for saving to or loading from the USB device may differ depending on the type of data or the status of the instrument. NOTE • The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of 5V/500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above this, since this can cause damage to the instrument itself.  Connecting a USB device • When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. NOTICE • Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device while executing playback/recording and file management operations (such as Save, Delete and Format), or when accessing the USB device. Failure to observe this may result in “freezing” of the operation of the instrument or corruption of the USB device and the data. • When connecting then disconnecting the USB device (and vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the two operations. NOTE • When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is less than 3 meters. Do not connect an extension cable. Using a USB Flash Drive By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device.  Number of USB flash drives that can be used Only one USB flash drive can be connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.  Formatting a USB flash drive You should format the USB flash drive only with this instrument (page 64). A USB flash drive formatted on another device may not operate properly. NOTICE • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting does not contain important data.  To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each USB flash drive. If you are saving data to the USB flash drive, make sure to disable write-protect.  Turning off the instrument When turning off the instrument, make sure that the instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by playback/recording or file management (such as during Save, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do so may corrupt the USB flash drive and the data. 62 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual USB Flash Drive Operations NOTE • Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 62. • Messages may appear on the display during File Control procedures to aid in smooth operation. Refer to the Message List on page 69 for details. 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, and wait until “USB” appears on the left corner of the display. The “USB” indication confirms that the connected USB flash drive has been mounted or recognized. Mounting (flashes) 2 Mounted (lights) Hold down the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. File Control Display List Display File Control function Page Load STY Loading a Style File 67 Load USR Loading User Data from a USB Flash Drive 66 Save SMF Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Drive 65 Save USR Saving User Data to a USB Flash Drive 64 Del SMF Deleting a SMF File in a USB Flash Drive 68 Del USR Deleting a User File in a USB Flash Drive 68 Format? Formatting a USB Flash Drive 64 Exit? Exiting from a File Control Display 69 NOTE • You can also exit from a File Control display only by pressing the [FUNCTION] button. Recognizable file location in the USB flash drive for Song playback (page 28) USB flash drive (Root) Song File Load STY Song File Hold for longer than a second. Can be selected/ played. Song File Song File  If “UnFormat” followed by “Format?” Reference Connecting a USB Flash Drive Cannot be selected/ played. appears: This indicates that the connected USB flash drive requires formatting. Execute the Format operation by following the instructions starting with step 2 on page 64. NOTE The File Control display cannot be called up in the following situations. • During playback of Style, Pattern, or Song • When “USB” does not appear even if you have connected a USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. NOTE • No sound will be produced if the keyboard is played while the File Control display is showing, and only buttons related to File Control operations will be active. 3 IMPORTANT • If you manage the Song files in the USB flash drive by using a computer, etc., make sure to store the data either in the USB flash drive's root directory or a firstlevel/second-level folder in the root directory. Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a secondlevel folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument. Song title display language File names containing Japanese katakana characters will be properly displayed if the instrument’s display language is set to “Japanese.” All display information other than file names will be displayed in English even if “Japanese” is selected. For details, refer to page 61 Function 069 (PSR-E453)/Function 070 (PSR-EW400). Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up the desired File Control function, then execute it. For details, refer to the table on the right. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 63 USB Flash Drive Operations Formatting a USB Flash Drive The Format operation lets you prepare commercially available USB flash drive for use with this instrument. NOTICE • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting does not contain important data. 1 2 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Format?.” Format? 3 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. Reference Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again or the [+/YES] button to execute the Format operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears, and the “USER FILES” folder will be created in the USB flash drive. Saving User Data to a USB Flash Drive The following data created on this instrument comprise the “User Data.” • All 10 User Songs (page 32) • Styles which have been transferred from a computer then loaded to Style numbers 221–230 (page 67). • All the Registration Memory settings (page 35) The User Data can be saved as a single “User File” (.usr) to a USB flash drive. NOTE • The extension (.usr) of the User File will not be shown on the display of this instrument. Confirm the extension on the computer display when connecting the USB flash drive to a computer. 1 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Save USR.” Save USR 3 NOTICE • The Format operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 5 Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. As the target file name, “USER***” (***: number) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a different file name from “USER001”– “USER100.” USER001 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. Overwriting existing files If a file that already contains data is selected as the target user file, an overwrite confirmation message will appear. 64 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual USB Flash Drive Operations 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Save operation. Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Drive After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears, and a User file (.usr) will be saved in a “USER FILES” folder which will automatically be created on the USB flash drive. A User Song can be converted to SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0 and saved to a USB flash drive. NOTICE • The Save operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. NOTE • The amount of time required for this operation may vary depending on the condition of the USB flash drive. SMF (Standard MIDI File) format With this format, various events via the keyboard performance such as note on/off and Voice selection will be recorded as MIDI data. The SMF Format 0 and Format 1 are available. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available Song files (MIDI files) are provided in SMF Format 0. NOTE Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. NOTE • If you want to recall the User file (.usr) to this instrument again, execute the Load operation (page 66). • Patterns recorded to a User Song cannot be converted to SMF. • The DSP effect (page 48) cannot be converted to SMF format. 1 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Save SMF.” Save SMF 3 Reference 6 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. As the target User Song, “USER**” (**: number 1–10) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a different User Song from “USER01”–“USER10” then press the [0/EXECUTE] button. User 1 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. As the target file name on the USB flash drive, “SONG***” (***: number 1–100) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select the different file. SONG001 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 65 USB Flash Drive Operations 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. Overwriting existing files If a file that already contains data is selected, an overwrite confirmation message will appear. 6 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Save operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears, and a User Song will be saved as the SMF format 0 in a “USER FILES” folder which will automatically be created on the USB flash drive. Loading User Data from a USB Flash Drive A User data (page 64) saved as a User file (.usr) to the USB flash drive can be loaded to this instrument. NOTICE • Loading a User file will overwrite and erase the existing data, including all 10 User Songs, Style data loaded to the Style numbers 221–230, and all the Registration Memory settings. Save important data you want to keep to a separate USB flash drive before loading a User file. IMPORTANT • Note that User files should be saved in the “USER FILES” folder on the USB flash drive. Files saved outside this folder cannot be recognized. 1 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Load USR.” NOTICE • The Save operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. NOTE • The amount of time required for this operation may vary depending on the condition of the USB flash drive. • If a Pattern has been recorded to the User Song, the Save operation cannot be executed by pressing the [0/ EXECUTE] button or the [+/YES] button, and “Can’tUse” appears on the display. Reference 7 Load USR 3 Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. “USER***” (***: number) appears on the display as the User file name in the USB flash drive. As desired, rotate the dial to select a different User file. USER001 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Load operation. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. NOTICE • The Load operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 66 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual USB Flash Drive Operations 6 Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. 7 Check the loaded data by calling up the User Song, one of the Styles 221–230, and Registration Memory settings. 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. As the Load destination, “Load To? ***” (***: 221– 230) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a different number. Load To? 221 Loading a Style File Style data created on another instrument or a computer can be loaded to the Style numbers 221–230, and you can play them like the internal preset Styles. The following two Load operations are available. 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. 6 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Load operation. • Loading of a Style file (.sty) saved on the root directory on the USB flash drive • Loading of a Style file (.sty) transferred from a computer via the Musicsoft Downloader and stored in the internal memory of this instrument After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. NOTICE • The Load operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. NOTE • For instructions on transferring a Style file from a computer via the Musicsoft Downloader, refer to the online PDF manual (page 11) “Computer-related Operations.” After data transfer, load the Style data to one of the Style numbers 221–230 to enable playback. NOTICE A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 7 Press the [STYLE] button, rotate the dial to select a Style from 221–230, and then try playing it back. 1 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Load STY.” Reference • Loading a Style file will overwrite and erase the existing data of the destination number. Save important data you want to keep to a separate USB flash drive before loading. Load STY 3 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. The name of a Style file in the USB flash drive or internal memory of this instrument will appear on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a different Style file. DiscoFox USb PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 67 USB Flash Drive Operations Deleting a User File in the USB Flash Drive Deleting an SMF File in the USB Flash Drive User Files (.usr) in the root directory of the USB flash drive can be deleted. You can delete a SMF file that has been saved in the USB flash drive via the Save SMF operation (page 65). IMPORTANT • Only User files (.usr) saved in the “USER FILES” folder on the USB flash drive can be deleted. Files outside this folder cannot be recognized. 1 2 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Del USR.” IMPORTANT • Only SMF files (.mid) saved in the “USER FILES” folder on the USB flash drive can be deleted. Files outside this folder cannot be recognized. This operation applies only to file names with the “SONG***” (***: 001–100) format. 1 Hold the [FUNCTION] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Del SMF.” Del USR Del SMF 3 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. User file names in the USB flash drive appear on the display as “USER****” (****: number). If desired, rotate the dial to select a different User file. 3 USER001 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. SMF file names in the USB flash drive appear on the display as “SONG****” (****: number). If desired, rotate the dial to select a different SMF file. Reference SONG001 4 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete operation. 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. NOTICE • The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 6 68 Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. NOTICE • The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 6 Press the [FUNCTION] button to exit from the File Control display. USB Flash Drive Operations Message List Message To exit from the File Control display, press the [FUNCTION], [VOICE], [STYLE], [SONG] or [PATTERN] button. You can also exit from the File Control function mode as follows: 1 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Exit?.” Exit? 2 Comment Can’tUse • Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the USB flash drive is being accessed. • Displayed when attempting to save a User Song recorded Pattern as SMF format 0. Complet. Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission. Data Err Displayed when the user song contains illegal data. Disk Ful Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the memory becomes full. Delete any unnecessary data or use another USB flash drive. Error Displayed when a file error or operational error occurs. File Ful Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files exceeds the capacity. Delete the unnecessary data or use another USB flash drive. no data There is no data in the memory. Press the [0/EXECUTE] button to exit from the File Control display. no file There is no file in the memory. Ovr (Flashes) Communication with the USB flash drive has been shut down because of overcurrent to the USB flash drive. Disconnect the USB flash drive from the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Protect Displayed when trying to save or delete data on a protected USB flash drive, or formatting a protected USB flash drive. Set protect to off and try again. UnFormat Displayed when connecting an unformatted USB flash drive. UseAdpt USB flash drive save, delete, and format operations cannot be performed when the instrument is being powered from battery. Use an AC adaptor. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Reference Exiting from a File Control Display 69 Troubleshooting Appendix Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off suddenly and unexpectedly. This is normal. If an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used, power may be turned off suddenly and unexpectedly. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument The instrument is automatically turned off even if no operation is done. This is normal. This occurs due to the Auto Power Off function (page 16). • The volume is too soft. • The sound quality is poor. • The Style/Pattern/Song/Arpeggio stops unexpectedly or will not play. • The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. • The instrument turns off when a USB flash drive is connected. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones or completely recharged ones, or use the AC adaptor. No sound is produced even when the keyboard is played, or a Song, Style, or Pattern is being played back. Check whether a set of headphones or an audio cable is connected to the [PHONES/OUTPUT], or not. When such a connection is made, no sound is output from the speaker of this instrument. (PSR-EW400) Check the on/off status of the Speaker Mute setting (page 38). Make sure to set to OFF. Check the on/off status of the Local Control (page 61). Normally, set this parameter to ON. Appendix The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. No sound is produced even when playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard, although chords played in the left hand area are recognized. Check whether or not the Dictionary function (page 55) is used. When used, this is normal. Not all of the Voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off, when playing the keyboard, Arpeggio, Style or Pattern or Song. You have exceeded 48 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony (the maximum amount of notes that can be played simultaneously) of this instrument. If the Main, Dual, and Split Voices are being used along with playback of Arpeggio, Style, Pattern or Song, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”). The sound of the Voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the Voice may be slightly different from note to note. The keyboard performance and playback of Style/Pattern/Song produces an unexpected or inappropriate sound, and cannot be restored to the normal status. Using the Knobs can produce dramatic changes in the sound, but may also produce unexpected or undesired sounds. If you want to restore the original, normal sound before being changed by the Knobs, press the [DSP] button to turn DSP off, change the Voice, Style, Pattern or Song, or press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button to reset the panel settings. The Style, Pattern or Song does not start even when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. The Arpeggio does not start even when the note is pressed with the Arpeggio turned on. Check the on/off status of the External Clock (page 61). Normally, set this parameter to OFF. The volume of the Style, Pattern or Song is too low. Check the volume setting in the Functions (pages 53 and 57). The chords played in the left hand area cannot be recognized even when ACMP is turned on. Check the Split Point setting (page 53). Set this to an appropriate value. Style parts other than the Rhythm part produce no sound. Check the on/off status of the ACMP (page 26). Make sure to turn ACMP on. The ACMP indicator does not appear on the display when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Check the on/off status of the [STYLE] lamp. When using a Style, press the [STYLE] button to turn on the [STYLE] lamp. Refer to the “Message List” on page 69 as required. 70 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Specifications Product Name Dimensions (W x D x H) Size/Weight Weight Control Interface Other Controllers Display Panel Tone Generation Polyphony Voices Preset Number of Keys Touch Response Pitch Bend Wheel Knobs Type Language Language Tone Generation Technology Effects Functions Preset Accompaniment Styles Reverb Chorus Master EQ Harmony DSP Dual Split Arpeggio Melody Suppressor Number of Styles Fingering Style Control External Styles Other Features Music Database One Touch Setting (OTS) Compatibility Patterns Preset Preset Songs (MIDI) Recording Format Functions Storage and Connectivity Amplifiers/ Speakers Amplifiers Speakers Live! Grand Piano + 236 panel Voices + 24 Drum/SFX kits + 40 Arpeggio + 457 XGlite Voices GM, XGlite 9 types 5 types 6 types 26 types 10 types Yes Yes 150 types 237 panel Voices + 24 Drum/SFX kits + 40 Arpeggio + 457 XGlite Voices Yes 220 Multi finger ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, SYNC STOP, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL, TRACK ON/OFF 10 378 Yes Style File Format (SFF) Number of Patterns Number of Sections Number of Preset Songs Number of Songs Number of Tracks Data Capacity Playback Recording Lesson/Guide USB Audio (USB TO HOST) Registration Number of Memory Buttons Metronome Tempo Range Overall Controls Transpose Tuning Scale Type Miscellaneous PIANO Button Internal Memory Storage External Drives Connectivity AWM Stereo Sampling 48 Number of Voices Compatibility Types Yes Yes LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) English English 25 5 30 10 6 (5 Melody + 1 Style/Pattern) Approx. 19,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded) SMF (Formats 0 & 1) Original File Format (SMF 0 conversion function) Lesson 1 – 3 (Listening, Timing, Waiting), Repeat & Learn, Chord Dictionary 44.1 kHz, 16 bit, stereo 4 (x 8 banks) Yes 11 – 280 -12 to 0, 0 to +12 427.0 – 440.0 – 453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments) 5 types Yes (Portable Grand Button) Approx. 1.29 MB USB flash drive USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE, USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE, DC IN 16V, Headphones, DC IN 12V, Headphones/Output, Sustain Pedal, AUX IN (Stereo-mini), Sustain Pedal, AUX IN (Stereo-mini) OUTPUT (L/L+R, R) 6W+6W 12 W + 12 W (When using PA-150 AC adaptor) (When using PA-300C AC adaptor) 12 cm x 2 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Appendix Keyboard PSR-E453 PSR-EW400 Digital Keyboard 946 mm x 405 mm x 140 mm 1178 mm x 412 mm x 138 mm (37-1/4” x 15-15/16” x 5-1/2”) (46-3/8” x 16-1/4” x 5-7/16”) 6.6 kg (14 lbs 9 oz.) 8.4 kg (18 lbs 8 oz.) (not including batteries) (not including batteries) 61 76 Soft, Medium, Hard, Fixed 71 Specifications Adaptor Power Supply Batteries Power Supply Power Consumption PA-150 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries 8W (When using PA-150 AC adaptor) Auto Power Off Included Accessories Separately Sold Accessories (May not be available depending on your area.) • Owner’s Manual • Data List • AC adaptor* (PA-150 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) * May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer. • Music Rest • Online Member Product Registration • AC adaptor: PA-150 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Keyboard Stand: L-2C • Headphones: HPH-150/HPH-100/ HPH-50 • Footswitch: FC4A/FC5 • Wireless MIDI adaptor: UD-BT01 PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Six “D” size alkaline (LR20), manganese (R20) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries 11 W (When using PA-300C AC adaptor) Yes • Owner’s Manual • Data List • AC adaptor* (PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha), power cord* * May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer. • Music Rest • Online Member Product Registration • AC adaptor: PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Keyboard Stand: L-6 • Headphones: HPH-150/HPH-100/ HPH-50 • Footswitch: FC4A/FC5 • Wireless MIDI adaptor: UD-BT01 * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Appendix 72 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual Index A E A-B Repeat ................................29 AC Adaptor ................................14 Accessories ...............................10 ACMP ........................................26 Arpeggio ..............................24, 49 Arpeggio Quantize ....................49 Arpeggio Type ...........................24 Arpeggio Velocity ......................60 Attack ..................................46, 59 Audio Device .............................36 Audio Loop Back .......................60 Auto Accompaniment ................26 Auto Accompaniment area ........26 Auto Power Off ....................16, 61 AUX IN ......................................36 EG (Envelope Generator) ......... 46 Ending ....................................... 50 EQ (Equalizer) .......................... 42 External Clock ........................... 60 Backup ......................................39 Backup Clear .............................39 Base Note .................................43 Battery .......................................14 Battery Type ........................15, 61 BGM (Background Music) .........56 Fast Forward ............................. 29 Fast Reverse ............................. 29 File Control Display ................... 63 Fill ............................................. 50 Filter .................................... 46, 59 Fine Tuning ............................... 41 Flash Clear ............................... 39 Footswitch ............................17, 49 Formatting ................................. 64 Function .................................... 58 H Harmony ................................... 23 Harmony Type ........................... 60 Headphones ............................. 16 Chord Dictionary .......................55 Chord Type ................................54 Chorus ................................46, 59 Chorus Type ..............................40 Computer ..................................36 Computer-related Operations .... 11 Connection ................................36 Cutoff ...................................46, 59 D Data List .................................... 11 Del SMF ....................................68 Del USR ....................................68 Demo Song ...............................28 Display ......................................19 DSP ..................................... 47, 48 DSP Part ...................................48 DSP Type ..................................48 Dual Voice ...........................21, 45 Octave ...................................... 59 One Touch Setting (OTS) ......... 41 Output ....................................... 38 P Pan ........................................... 59 Pattern ................................. 27, 50 Pattern Retrigger ................. 47, 52 Pause ....................................... 29 Pedal ................................... 17, 49 Pitch ......................................... 41 Pitch Bend Range .................... 58 Power ........................................ 16 R I C O Initial Send ................................ 60 Initialization ............................... 39 Intro ........................................... 50 iPhone/iPad ............................... 37 iPhone/iPad Connection Manual .............................................. 11 K Keyboard Out ............................ 60 Keyboard Stand ........................ 17 Knob ................................... 25, 46 L Language .................................. 61 Lesson ................................ 30, 61 Load STY .................................. 67 Load USR ................................. 65 Local Control ............................. 60 M Main .......................................... 50 Main Voice ................................ 20 Master Volume .......................... 16 Melody Suppressor ..............37, 59 Melody Voice ............................ 57 Random .................................... 56 Recording ................................. 32 Registration Memory ................ 35 Release .............................. 46, 59 Repeat ................................ 29, 31 Resonance ......................... 46, 59 Retrigger Rate .......................... 47 Reverb ................................ 46, 59 Reverb Type .............................. 40 S Save SMF ................................. 65 Save USR ................................. 64 Scale ........................................ 43 Section ............................... 50, 52 Song ................................... 28, 56 Song Book .................................11 Song Out .................................. 60 Speaker .............................. 16, 38 Specifications ........................... 71 Split Point ................................. 53 Split Voice ........................... 21, 45 Stop Accompaniment ............... 53 Style ................................... 26, 50 Style Out ................................... 60 Sustain ..................................... 17 Synchro Stop ............................ 51 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 73 Appendix B F Message List ............................ 69 Metronome ............................... 22 MIDI .......................................... 60 MIDI Basics ...............................11 MIDI Reference ..........................11 Music Database ........................ 26 Music Rest ................................ 10 Index T Tap Start ..............................52, 57 Tempo ...........................22, 52, 57 Time Signature ..........................22 Touch Response .......................42 Track ..............................29, 32, 51 Transpose ..................................41 Troubleshooting .........................70 Tuning ........................................44 U USB Flash Drive ........................62 USB TO DEVICE ......................62 USB TO HOST ..........................36 V Voice ...................................20, 45 Volume ......................................16 Volume (AUX IN) .......................58 Volume (Harmony) ....................60 Volume (Metronome) .................22 Volume (Pattern) .......................53 Volume (Song) ..........................57 Volume (Style) ...........................53 Volume (USB TO HOST) ...........58 Volume (Voice) ..........................59 Volume Balance ........................46 Y Your Tempo ...............................61 Appendix 74 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual MEMO PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 75 OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko (battery) laitetta verkosta. (standby) Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. (weee_battery_eu_en_01) 76 PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, NPV, PSRE, PSREW, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/ noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA. © 2015 Yamaha Corporation of America. PSR-E453/PSR-EW400 Owner’s Manual 77 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. MALTA NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: +1-416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: +1-714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México, D.F., C.P. 03900 Tel: +52-55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B – Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP, Brazil Tel: +55-11-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: +54-11-4119-7000 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: +31-347-358040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: +33-1-6461-4000 Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A. AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza, Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela Tel: +58-212-943-1877 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: +39-02-93577-1 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki, Greece Tel: +30-210-6686260 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46-31-89-34-00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Denmark, Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark Tel: +45-44-92-49-00 FINLAND Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama, P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: +44-1908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen, Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: +41-44-3878080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: +48-22-880-08-88 Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: +359-2-978-20-25 CYPRUS Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd. Nikis Ave 2k 1086 Nicosia Tel: + 357-22-511080 Major Music Center 21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus Tel: (392) 227 9213 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 ITALY SWEDEN VENEZUELA BULGARIA Olimpus Music Ltd. Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta Tel: +356-2133-2093 F-Musiikki Oy Antaksentie 4 FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland Tel: +358 (0)96185111 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway Tel: +47-6716-7800 ICELAND Hljodfaerahusid Ehf. Sidumula 20 IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: +354-525-5050 CROATIA Euro Unit D.O.O. Slakovec 73 40305 Nedelisce Tel: +38540829400 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: +7-495-626-5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 AFRICA Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey Tel: +90-212-999-8010 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: +86-400-051-7700 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: +852-2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Private Limited Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002, Haryana, India Tel: +91-124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: +62-21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea Tel: +82-2-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: +60-3-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: +65-6740-9200 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd. 2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist. New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: +886-2-7741-8888 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: +66-2215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, VIC 3006, Australia Tel: +61-3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: +64-9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com DMI14 Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan (For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrase 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Department © 2016 Yamaha Corporation Published 03/2016 POAP-A0 Printed in China ZT18040